<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
	<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Tjuly</id>
	<title>MoodleDocs - User contributions [en]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Tjuly"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/Special:Contributions/Tjuly"/>
	<updated>2026-04-23T05:13:37Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.43.5</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Moodle_app_FAQ&amp;diff=82690</id>
		<title>Moodle app FAQ</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Moodle_app_FAQ&amp;diff=82690"/>
		<updated>2011-04-11T05:12:12Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tjuly: /* Server-side */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Work in progress}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How can I use Moodle on mobile devices? ==&lt;br /&gt;
There are currently 3 main ways to use Moodle on mobile devices:&lt;br /&gt;
# Users can open Moodle sites in their mobile web browers (not recommended).&lt;br /&gt;
# Users can download native apps for their mobile devices.&lt;br /&gt;
# Admins can configure their Moodle site to be Mobile-accessible through server extensions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mobile Apps ===&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.moodletouch.com MoodleTouch] (aka &#039;&#039;mTouch&#039;&#039;) for iOS, created by Ali OzGur.&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://mpage.hk/ mPage] for iOS and Android (work in progress), created by Mass Media HK.&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://codeguild.org/app/mbot/ Mbot] for Android, created by Code Guild.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Server-side ===&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://m.vletools.com Do MobiQuiz] - alpha version of web-client to accomplish Moodle quizzes on Iphone/Android devices and list HTML-pages. &lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.mobilemoodle.org/momo18/ MoMo] (Moodle for Mobiles) - Requires a server extension and a client app; supports most mobile OSes including Symbian.&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://mle.sourceforge.net MLE-Moodle] - Allows course designers to make a separate set of Moodle pages for mobile users.&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://code.google.com/p/moodbile/ Moodbile] - Reference implementation of Moodle Web Services. Under development.&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://iphone.moodle.com.au iPhone4Moodle] - Under development.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Development:Mobile app]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Moodle for Mobiles]] is designed to work with mobile phones in Japan.&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Moodle_for_Mobiles#Creating_Mobile_Learning_Tutorials_for_iPhone.2FiPod_Touch|Creating Mobile Learning Tutorials for iPhone/iPod Touch]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Moodle.org Forum Discussion ===&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=104599 Moodle Mobile for iPhone]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=134778 Moodle on Android]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=104949 Twitter plug-in for Moodle]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?id=7798 Moodle for mobile forum]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=31895 Moodle for Mobiles Quiz code released] &lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=31895&amp;amp;parent=185847 Re: Customised Scripts -Moodle for Mobiles projects use of] &lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=143973 Moodle for mobile browsers]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=33033 Moodle for Mobiles Project]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=141815 Comparisons and Advocacy &amp;gt; Mobile Moodle]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=162872 Proposal for Supporting Mobile Themes and Browser Detection]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=123331 Emulators for mobile platforms]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Other Links ===&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://yuiblog.com/blog/2008/02/06/iphone-cacheability/ YUI blog post on how to optimise for the iPhone&#039;s cache]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.mobilestudy.org/moodle/mobilequiz/ Moodle Mobile Quiz]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Moodle pour les mobiles]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tjuly</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Moodle_app_FAQ&amp;diff=82689</id>
		<title>Moodle app FAQ</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Moodle_app_FAQ&amp;diff=82689"/>
		<updated>2011-04-11T05:09:48Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tjuly: /* Server-side */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Work in progress}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How can I use Moodle on mobile devices? ==&lt;br /&gt;
There are currently 3 main ways to use Moodle on mobile devices:&lt;br /&gt;
# Users can open Moodle sites in their mobile web browers (not recommended).&lt;br /&gt;
# Users can download native apps for their mobile devices.&lt;br /&gt;
# Admins can configure their Moodle site to be Mobile-accessible through server extensions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mobile Apps ===&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.moodletouch.com MoodleTouch] (aka &#039;&#039;mTouch&#039;&#039;) for iOS, created by Ali OzGur.&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://mpage.hk/ mPage] for iOS and Android (work in progress), created by Mass Media HK.&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://codeguild.org/app/mbot/ Mbot] for Android, created by Code Guild.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Server-side ===&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://m.vletools.com Do MobiQuiz] - alpha versin of web-client to accomplish Moodle quizzes on Iphone/Android devices and list HTML-pages. &lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.mobilemoodle.org/momo18/ MoMo] (Moodle for Mobiles) - Requires a server extension and a client app; supports most mobile OSes including Symbian.&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://mle.sourceforge.net MLE-Moodle] - Allows course designers to make a separate set of Moodle pages for mobile users.&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://code.google.com/p/moodbile/ Moodbile] - Reference implementation of Moodle Web Services. Under development.&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://iphone.moodle.com.au iPhone4Moodle] - Under development.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Development:Mobile app]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Moodle for Mobiles]] is designed to work with mobile phones in Japan.&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Moodle_for_Mobiles#Creating_Mobile_Learning_Tutorials_for_iPhone.2FiPod_Touch|Creating Mobile Learning Tutorials for iPhone/iPod Touch]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Moodle.org Forum Discussion ===&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=104599 Moodle Mobile for iPhone]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=134778 Moodle on Android]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=104949 Twitter plug-in for Moodle]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?id=7798 Moodle for mobile forum]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=31895 Moodle for Mobiles Quiz code released] &lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=31895&amp;amp;parent=185847 Re: Customised Scripts -Moodle for Mobiles projects use of] &lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=143973 Moodle for mobile browsers]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=33033 Moodle for Mobiles Project]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=141815 Comparisons and Advocacy &amp;gt; Mobile Moodle]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=162872 Proposal for Supporting Mobile Themes and Browser Detection]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=123331 Emulators for mobile platforms]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Other Links ===&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://yuiblog.com/blog/2008/02/06/iphone-cacheability/ YUI blog post on how to optimise for the iPhone&#039;s cache]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.mobilestudy.org/moodle/mobilequiz/ Moodle Mobile Quiz]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Moodle pour les mobiles]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tjuly</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Moodle_app_FAQ&amp;diff=82611</id>
		<title>Moodle app FAQ</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Moodle_app_FAQ&amp;diff=82611"/>
		<updated>2011-04-07T08:21:17Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tjuly: /* Mobile Apps */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Work in progress}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How can I use Moodle on mobile devices? ==&lt;br /&gt;
There are currently 3 main ways to use Moodle on mobile devices:&lt;br /&gt;
# Users can open Moodle sites in their mobile web browers (not recommended).&lt;br /&gt;
# Users can download native apps for their mobile devices.&lt;br /&gt;
# Admins can configure their Moodle site to be Mobile-accessible through server extensions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mobile Apps ===&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.moodletouch.com MoodleTouch] (aka &#039;&#039;mTouch&#039;&#039;) for iOS, created by Ali OzGur.&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://mpage.hk/ mPage] for iOS and Android (work in progress), created by Mass Media HK.&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://codeguild.org/app/mbot/ Mbot] for Android, created by Code Guild.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Server-side ===&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.mobilemoodle.org/momo18/ MoMo] (Moodle for Mobiles) - Requires a server extension and a client app; supports most mobile OSes including Symbian.&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://mle.sourceforge.net MLE-Moodle] - Allows course designers to make a separate set of Moodle pages for mobile users.&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://code.google.com/p/moodbile/ Moodbile] - Reference implementation of Moodle Web Services. Under development.&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://iphone.moodle.com.au iPhone4Moodle] - Under development.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Development:Mobile app]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Moodle for Mobiles]] is designed to work with mobile phones in Japan.&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Moodle_for_Mobiles#Creating_Mobile_Learning_Tutorials_for_iPhone.2FiPod_Touch|Creating Mobile Learning Tutorials for iPhone/iPod Touch]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Moodle.org Forum Discussion ===&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=104599 Moodle Mobile for iPhone]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=134778 Moodle on Android]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=104949 Twitter plug-in for Moodle]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?id=7798 Moodle for mobile forum]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=31895 Moodle for Mobiles Quiz code released] &lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=31895&amp;amp;parent=185847 Re: Customised Scripts -Moodle for Mobiles projects use of] &lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=143973 Moodle for mobile browsers]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=33033 Moodle for Mobiles Project]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=141815 Comparisons and Advocacy &amp;gt; Mobile Moodle]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=162872 Proposal for Supporting Mobile Themes and Browser Detection]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=123331 Emulators for mobile platforms]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Other Links ===&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://yuiblog.com/blog/2008/02/06/iphone-cacheability/ YUI blog post on how to optimise for the iPhone&#039;s cache]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.mobilestudy.org/moodle/mobilequiz/ Moodle Mobile Quiz]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Moodle pour les mobiles]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tjuly</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Moodle_app_FAQ&amp;diff=82604</id>
		<title>Moodle app FAQ</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Moodle_app_FAQ&amp;diff=82604"/>
		<updated>2011-04-07T04:19:23Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tjuly: /* Mobile Apps */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Work in progress}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How can I use Moodle on mobile devices? ==&lt;br /&gt;
There are currently 3 main ways to use Moodle on mobile devices:&lt;br /&gt;
# Users can open Moodle sites in their mobile web browers (not recommended).&lt;br /&gt;
# Users can download native apps for their mobile devices.&lt;br /&gt;
# Admins can configure their Moodle site to be Mobile-accessible through server extensions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mobile Apps ===&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://m.vletools.com Do Moodle Mobile] for Iphones/Android/Ipad. Free mobile service to attempt quizzes through mobile devices. Developed by Moodle XML Converter team.&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.moodletouch.com MoodleTouch] (aka &#039;&#039;mTouch&#039;&#039;) for iOS, created by Ali OzGur.&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://mpage.hk/ mPage] for iOS and Android (work in progress), created by Mass Media HK.&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://codeguild.org/app/mbot/ Mbot] for Android, created by Code Guild.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Server-side ===&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.mobilemoodle.org/momo18/ MoMo] (Moodle for Mobiles) - Requires a server extension and a client app; supports most mobile OSes including Symbian.&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://mle.sourceforge.net MLE-Moodle] - Allows course designers to make a separate set of Moodle pages for mobile users.&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://code.google.com/p/moodbile/ Moodbile] - Reference implementation of Moodle Web Services. Under development.&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://iphone.moodle.com.au iPhone4Moodle] - Under development.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Development:Mobile app]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Moodle for Mobiles]] is designed to work with mobile phones in Japan.&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Moodle_for_Mobiles#Creating_Mobile_Learning_Tutorials_for_iPhone.2FiPod_Touch|Creating Mobile Learning Tutorials for iPhone/iPod Touch]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Moodle.org Forum Discussion ===&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=104599 Moodle Mobile for iPhone]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=134778 Moodle on Android]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=104949 Twitter plug-in for Moodle]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?id=7798 Moodle for mobile forum]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=31895 Moodle for Mobiles Quiz code released] &lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=31895&amp;amp;parent=185847 Re: Customised Scripts -Moodle for Mobiles projects use of] &lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=143973 Moodle for mobile browsers]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=33033 Moodle for Mobiles Project]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=141815 Comparisons and Advocacy &amp;gt; Mobile Moodle]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=162872 Proposal for Supporting Mobile Themes and Browser Detection]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=123331 Emulators for mobile platforms]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Other Links ===&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://yuiblog.com/blog/2008/02/06/iphone-cacheability/ YUI blog post on how to optimise for the iPhone&#039;s cache]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.mobilestudy.org/moodle/mobilequiz/ Moodle Mobile Quiz]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Moodle pour les mobiles]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tjuly</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Moodle_app_FAQ&amp;diff=82603</id>
		<title>Moodle app FAQ</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Moodle_app_FAQ&amp;diff=82603"/>
		<updated>2011-04-07T04:17:18Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tjuly: /* Mobile Apps */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Work in progress}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How can I use Moodle on mobile devices? ==&lt;br /&gt;
There are currently 3 main ways to use Moodle on mobile devices:&lt;br /&gt;
# Users can open Moodle sites in their mobile web browers (not recommended).&lt;br /&gt;
# Users can download native apps for their mobile devices.&lt;br /&gt;
# Admins can configure their Moodle site to be Mobile-accessible through server extensions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mobile Apps ===&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://m.vletools.com Moodle Quiz Mobile] for Iphones/Android/Ipad. Free mobile service to attempt quizzes through mobile devices. Developed by Moodle XML Converter team.&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.moodletouch.com MoodleTouch] (aka &#039;&#039;mTouch&#039;&#039;) for iOS, created by Ali OzGur.&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://mpage.hk/ mPage] for iOS and Android (work in progress), created by Mass Media HK.&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://codeguild.org/app/mbot/ Mbot] for Android, created by Code Guild.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Server-side ===&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.mobilemoodle.org/momo18/ MoMo] (Moodle for Mobiles) - Requires a server extension and a client app; supports most mobile OSes including Symbian.&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://mle.sourceforge.net MLE-Moodle] - Allows course designers to make a separate set of Moodle pages for mobile users.&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://code.google.com/p/moodbile/ Moodbile] - Reference implementation of Moodle Web Services. Under development.&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://iphone.moodle.com.au iPhone4Moodle] - Under development.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Development:Mobile app]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Moodle for Mobiles]] is designed to work with mobile phones in Japan.&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Moodle_for_Mobiles#Creating_Mobile_Learning_Tutorials_for_iPhone.2FiPod_Touch|Creating Mobile Learning Tutorials for iPhone/iPod Touch]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Moodle.org Forum Discussion ===&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=104599 Moodle Mobile for iPhone]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=134778 Moodle on Android]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=104949 Twitter plug-in for Moodle]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?id=7798 Moodle for mobile forum]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=31895 Moodle for Mobiles Quiz code released] &lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=31895&amp;amp;parent=185847 Re: Customised Scripts -Moodle for Mobiles projects use of] &lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=143973 Moodle for mobile browsers]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=33033 Moodle for Mobiles Project]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=141815 Comparisons and Advocacy &amp;gt; Mobile Moodle]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=162872 Proposal for Supporting Mobile Themes and Browser Detection]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=123331 Emulators for mobile platforms]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Other Links ===&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://yuiblog.com/blog/2008/02/06/iphone-cacheability/ YUI blog post on how to optimise for the iPhone&#039;s cache]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.mobilestudy.org/moodle/mobilequiz/ Moodle Mobile Quiz]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Moodle pour les mobiles]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tjuly</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Import_and_export_FAQ&amp;diff=82262</id>
		<title>Import and export FAQ</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Import_and_export_FAQ&amp;diff=82262"/>
		<updated>2011-03-25T07:08:40Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tjuly: /* How do I import and export questions? */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== How do I import users? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* See [[Upload users]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How do I import course data? ==&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
* See [[Import course data]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I import and export grades?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Grade import]] (for Moodle 1.9 onwards).&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Grade export]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How do I import glossary entries? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For details see [[Import glossary entries]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Very useful tools are:&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.heroku.com/questions/glossary Moodle XML converter] Convert your glossary online just uploading your text and get Moodle XML file to import entries. Supports all glossary options, different types of input entries - Excel, concept - definition, Concept &amp;lt;break&amp;gt; definition, and some others. Also can convert from Moodle XML to text. &lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.irpens.co.uk/moodle/MoodleExcelToGlossary.xls David Fountain&#039;s Excel macro] An Excel workbook with macros to create an XML file.&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=91224&amp;amp;parent=489666 Yasu Imao&#039;s Moodle glossaryXMLconverter_html 4] A JavaScript based converter, works directly in your browser.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How do I import and export database entries? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Database export]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Adding a database entry]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== How can I enable Excel export for students? ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the Database activity you have the ability to allow students to export all the data in the following formats: CSV, Excel and ODS (OpenDocument Spreadsheet from OpenOffice).&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:ExportTab.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With this functionality students can choose to export the data of all fields or only of selected fields. (Picture fields cannot be exported.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, this feature is not enabled by default for students. You need to override the student permissions for the Database activity and choose &#039;Allow&#039; for the permission to &#039;View presets from all users&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:EnableExportView.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will result in the &#039;Export&#039; tab being visible to students in the Database activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also see [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=133712 this thread] for a discussion on this.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I import and export questions?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* See [[Import questions]] and [[Export questions]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://vletools.com Moodle XML converter] Free online service to create quizzes and glossaries from existing files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;OpenOffice&#039;&#039;&#039; template for creating questions in [[GIFT|GIFT format]]: http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=20705&amp;amp;parent=168385&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;MS Word&#039;&#039;&#039; template for creating questions in [[GIFT|GIFT format]]: http://www.soberit.hut.fi/sprg/resources/moodle/GiftConverter.html&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Excel&#039;&#039;&#039; to [[GIFT|GIFT format]] export tool: http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=66660&lt;br /&gt;
* The complete list: [[GIFT#Word_processors_and_Spreadsheets_tools_that_create_GIFTs|Word processors and Spreadsheets tools that create GIFTs]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Importing &amp;quot;GIFT&amp;quot; format files: https://www.acquin.org/moodle/help.php?file=formatgift.html&amp;amp;module=quiz&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://software.cristianoleoni.com/freebies/glossaryconv.php ATutor to Moodle converter] - see http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=115338.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/user.php?id=726938&amp;amp;course=5 Eoin Campbell is working on a XSLT based import/export module for Word] - stay tuned! &lt;br /&gt;
: See also his [http://www.moodle2word.net website for converting Moodle Questions into tables in a Microsoft Word file, and vice versa].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Which formats are used for importing questions? ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to create questions outside of Moodle these two text based formats might be the most important:&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
*[[GIFT]] - Moodle &#039;proprietary&#039; text format for import and export. Reasonably comprehensive.&lt;br /&gt;
: See [[GIFT format]].&lt;br /&gt;
: Here is a 2-column GIFT format reference sheet: [http://buypct.com/gift_reference.pdf GIFT Reference Sheet]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Moodle XML]] - Moodle &#039;proprietary&#039; xml format for import and export. Very comprehensive. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You find the complete list of supported formats under [[Import questions]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Which file formats can I use? ==&lt;br /&gt;
[TODO]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== What encodings should I use? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The recommended standard encoding for all Moodle files is [[UTF-8]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* See [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=62251 Importing Entries Using a Text File] for an example where a UTF-8 file with [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Byte-order_mark BOM] caused Database Activity entries not being imported. See also MDL-9075 (&amp;quot;User Upload Failure when file contains UTF-8 BOM&amp;quot;).&lt;br /&gt;
: Some of this information is collected at [[UTF-8 and BOM]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See also: &lt;br /&gt;
* [http://morgretdesigns.wordpress.com/2008/03/07/changing-file-encoding-on-a-csv-with-openoffice-calc/ Changing File Encoding on a CSV with OpenOffice Calc]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.internet-business-solutions.gr/lang-en/e-commerce/44-strategies/65-utf-8-csv UTF-8 CSV]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:Category:UTF-8]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Search Moodle Forums [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/search.php?search=subject%3Aimport+&amp;amp;id=5 subject:import].&lt;br /&gt;
* Search Moodle Forums [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/search.php?search=subject%3Aexport+&amp;amp;id=5 subject:export].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[XML FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[IMS Common Cartridge import]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* There&#039;s an interesting project on [http://groups.drupal.org/node/21559 integrating Drupal and Moodle quizzes] in the Drupal in Education User Group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; Contributed modules and plugins&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=161367 DocBook Module to Parse DocBook XML]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Import und Export FAQ]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tjuly</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=XML_FAQ&amp;diff=82261</id>
		<title>XML FAQ</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=XML_FAQ&amp;diff=82261"/>
		<updated>2011-03-25T07:07:58Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tjuly: /* Are there tools for converting to and from Moodle XML? */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;(If you don&#039;t find the answer to your question here, just post the question. There might be someone out there to provide the answer.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==XML in general==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Where do I find general information about XML?===&lt;br /&gt;
* http://www.w3schools.com/xml/default.asp - A host of information and hands-on examples&lt;br /&gt;
*http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/XML - A good starting point&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Moodle XML==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Is there only one kind of Moodle XML?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No, there are (at least) two different kinds of Moodle XML, one for importing/exporting &#039;&#039;glossaries&#039;&#039; and one for &#039;&#039;questions&#039;&#039; (quizzes), the latter being the one usually referred to as &amp;quot;Moodle XML&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then there is XML in the SCORM/IMS packages that Moodle can import and must be able to handle. These packages are educational content that has been marked up in a special way to be able to be used in compatible Learning Management Systems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;course backup and restore&#039;&#039; process also generates an XML file (inside the zip file) that contains all the information about the course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Where do I find documentation about Moodle XML?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The official documentation: [[Moodle XML]]&lt;br /&gt;
* A more thorough documentation: [http://www.qedoc.org/en/index.php?title=Moodle_XML_format Moodle XML format] by Quedoc&lt;br /&gt;
: [http://www.qedoc.org/en/index.php?title=Problems_when_transferring_XML_format_into_Moodle Problems when transferring XML format into Moodle]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[User:Frank Ralf/Moodle XML1]] (work in progress)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tools==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Are there tools for converting to and from Moodle XML?===&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://vletools.com Moodle XML Converter] - allows to create XML from text files. Also can converse Moodle XML into text file. Supports quiz and glossary.&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=91224#p489764 Glossary to XML Converter]&lt;br /&gt;
:A simple HTML file which converts TSV data to XML using JavaScript&lt;br /&gt;
* Microsoft Office macros: http://finemetronome.com/moodle/&lt;br /&gt;
* OpenOffice XML filters (TBA see [[User:Frank_Ralf/Moodle_XML1#OpenOffice_.26_XML|User:Frank_Ralf/Moodle XML1 &amp;gt; OpenOffice &amp;amp; XML]] for some pointers)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How can I view and edit XML files?===&lt;br /&gt;
XML is just text so you can view and edit it with any text editor. However, this isn&#039;t very easy for anything more than a trivial file. There are a number of dedicated XML editors available for many platforms. If you only need to view the XML, most browsers are able to render XML files. Some even let you view the source text and do some basic editing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; Moodle Docs&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Import and export FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; Contributed modules and plugins&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=161367 DocBook Module to Parse DocBook XML]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; Books&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.sitepoint.com/books/xml1/ No Nonsense XML Web Development With PHP] by Thomas Myer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:XML FAQ]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tjuly</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Import_questions&amp;diff=82260</id>
		<title>Import questions</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Import_questions&amp;diff=82260"/>
		<updated>2011-03-25T06:56:18Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tjuly: /* See also */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Questions}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle has a number of different formats that can be used to import questions into [[Question bank]] categories and as [[Adding a question page|lesson question pages]]. These include some proprietary quiz software formats, as well as text files and Moodle formats. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Importing questions from an existing file==&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to import questions from a file on your network/computer or from a file that has been saved or uploaded into your course files.  The underlying [[Import_questions#Character_encoding|character encoding]] of this file is important.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Question bank import process ===&lt;br /&gt;
The question bank allows you a great deal of flexibility when importing questions. To import questions into Moodle&#039;s [[Question bank]], use the Questions link in the course administration and select the import tab. In most versions of Moodle it is also possible to get to this screen (produced by ../question/import.php) while editing an existing quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Questions import 197.png|thumb|center|Import question formats from the import tab]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Select import tab&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the question type to import&lt;br /&gt;
*General: pick the category, determine if the context and category information that maybe contained in a GIFT or XML file should be used. &lt;br /&gt;
*Select what should happen if there are no grades or an error is detected in the import process.&lt;br /&gt;
*Determine the file to import&lt;br /&gt;
**Import from file upload.  Use the browse function to import a file from your computer. Use the &amp;quot;Upload this file&amp;quot; button to import the questions.&lt;br /&gt;
**Import from file already in course files. A popup window will take you to the course files start page. Use the &amp;quot;Import from this file&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Question bank import file gen import 1.png|thumb|center|General and import file parameters sections]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Lesson module process===&lt;br /&gt;
The question types that can be imported into a lesson are similar to question bank.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Lesson Import question types.png|thumb|center|Lesson screen asking which file type will be imported]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Lesson module|Lesson]] can only import from a file located on the teachers computer.&lt;br /&gt;
*In edit, using the expanded view&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the position where questions should be inserted into the lesson&lt;br /&gt;
*Click on the Import question link between the pages.&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the file type&lt;br /&gt;
*Use the browse function to find the file on your computer&lt;br /&gt;
*Import the selected file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Question import formats==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== [[GIFT]] === &lt;br /&gt;
Moodle &#039;proprietary&#039; text format for import and export. Reasonably comprehensive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== [[Moodle XML format|Moodle XML]] ===&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle &#039;proprietary&#039; xml format for import and export. Very comprehensive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== [[Aiken]] === &lt;br /&gt;
This format is an easy way of writing multiple-choice questions for import.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Blackboard === &lt;br /&gt;
From Moodle 1.7 onwards, if you&#039;re converting from Blackboard to Moodle, you can export your course and then import the question pools into Moodle using the Blackboard &amp;quot;POOL&amp;quot; type export format. It relies on XML functions being compiled into your PHP. Note that you must first unpack the exported zip file and provide Moodle with the appropriate .dat file. Note that this version does not work with Blackboard Version 6 and newer. (Use this format for ExamView 5 or 6)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Blackboard V6+ === &lt;br /&gt;
This module can import questions saved in Blackboard&#039;s export format. It provides limited support for Blackboard Version 6 and 7. It relies on XML functions being compiled into your PHP. You must upload the zip file exported from Blackboard. Note that this format only imports the main data file from the zip. Any other data (e.g. images) is ignored.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Course Test Manager === &lt;br /&gt;
This format enables you to import questions from the Course Test Manager from Course Technology.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== [[Embedded Answers (Cloze) question type|Embedded Answers (Cloze)]] === &lt;br /&gt;
This format is a multiple question, multiple answer question with embedded answers. They can be a bit tricky to develop, but they are a unique way of asking questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Examview === &lt;br /&gt;
ExamView 4 supported an XML export format that Moodle can import.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow these steps to import questions from ExamView 4.0.8&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Create a new test using ExamView&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. After selecting the types of questions and how many of each Click on File - Export – Change Save As Type to ExamView XML&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. After creating the export of your ExamView test login to your Moodle site&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Go to the course you wish to add the quiz to and Turn Editing On&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Scroll down to the topic or week you wish to add a Quiz Click add an activity – highlight quiz, Enter a name and introduction for the quiz and any other applicable information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Click save and display&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Editing quiz - click Edit then Import, click the radio button next to ExamView&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Browse to the location you saved the file highlight and click open, then click the upload this file button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
9. Review the questions imported, click continue, click on Quiz, select all and click add to quiz&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
10. Save Changes, click on the preview tab view the test and the quiz is ready.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are using a newer version of ExamView, you should export using Blackboard, extract the zip archive ExamView creates, then import in Moodle using Blackboard format (do not use 6+ format for moodle import, even though exam view calls this a Blackboard6+ file--it isn&#039;t).  You can choose one of the &amp;quot;.dat&amp;quot; files from the ExamView archive to import.  Note that images are not currently imported.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any questions that included images must be edited to &amp;quot;re-link&amp;quot; those images.  The image files can be found in the file folder that is in your item test bank directory of your course files. Click the edit tool next to a question in the question list.  If one or more images files are included in the question, you should see a placeholder with the image file name in it embedded with text in the text edit window.  Click on the placeholder and then click on the insert image tool of the text editor.  Navigate to the folder containing the image files. (It will be in the folder you uploaded the zipped question bank to).  Find the file with the same name as indicated in the image placeholder.  Type the alternate text then click &amp;quot;okay&amp;quot; to re-link the image.  Click on &amp;quot;okay&amp;quot; to return to the question list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===[[Hot Potatoes]]===&lt;br /&gt;
A freeware program that can export questions into Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note 1&#039;&#039;&#039;.- All types of Hot Potatoes question types can be imported into Moodle, but &#039;&#039;JCross&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;JMix&#039;&#039; questions will be changed to Short Answer questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Can be imported into the &#039;&#039;Quiz questions&#039;&#039; bank:&lt;br /&gt;
**Cloze questions (&#039;&#039;JCloze&#039;&#039;); &lt;br /&gt;
**Match questions (&#039;&#039;JMatch&#039;&#039;); &lt;br /&gt;
**Multiple Choice questions (&#039;&#039;JQuiz&#039;&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
**Short Answer questions (&#039;&#039;JQuiz&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;JCross&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;JMix&#039;&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Can be imported into Moodle&#039;s &#039;&#039;Lesson&#039;&#039; module:&lt;br /&gt;
**Match questions (&#039;&#039;JMatch&#039;&#039;); &lt;br /&gt;
**Multiple Choice questions (&#039;&#039;JQuiz&#039;&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note 2&#039;&#039;&#039;.- For Hot Potatoes&#039; Multiple Choice question type (&#039;&#039;JQuiz&#039;&#039;), the &#039;&#039;Multiple-choice&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Short answer&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Multi-select&#039;&#039; question-type will imported as they are. &#039;&#039;Hybrid&#039;&#039; questions will be imported as &#039;&#039;MultiChoice&#039;&#039; questions, i.e. they will not start as Short Answer questions and then change to Multiple Choice questions after several wrong responses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Learnwise===&lt;br /&gt;
This format can import multiple choice questions saved in Learnwise&#039;s XML format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===[[Missing word question format|Missing word]]===&lt;br /&gt;
This format is only used for  multiple choice questions and short answer questions, similar to GIFT.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== [[WebCT format]] === &lt;br /&gt;
This format supports importing multiple choice and short answers questions from WebCT&#039;s text format. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Caution:&#039;&#039;&#039; Keep in mind that WebCT allows more than one &amp;quot;blank&amp;quot; per short answer question; whereas, Moodle will only accommodate one blank per question. Questions that used multiple short answers in a question will not convert successfully.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Importing from other programs==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Diploma 6 ===&lt;br /&gt;
Diploma 6 also supports an XML export format that Moodle can import. If you are using a newer version of Diploma, here are the steps to  to export from Diploma and import to Moodle.  The steps are the same as those for Examview (see above).&lt;br /&gt;
*Export with the Blackboard LS 6.0 – 6.2 format. &lt;br /&gt;
*Upload the zip file to your course files and unzip the file.  Do not use the unzip feature in the quiz module – it won’t work. This will create a .dat file and a folder of images (if any of your questions included images).  &lt;br /&gt;
*Import the .dat file using the plain Blackboard (not the Blackboard 6.0 – 6.2) format.  The images are not imported at the same time, but they are available in that other folder that was in the zip file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As with Examview, any questions that include images must be edited to reestablish the links to those images. &lt;br /&gt;
*First, click the edit tool next to a question in the question list.  If there are any images in the question, you will see a placeholder with the image file name in it.  &lt;br /&gt;
*Click on the placeholder, and then the insert image tool of the text editor.  &lt;br /&gt;
*Navigate to the folder containing the image.  &lt;br /&gt;
*Find the file with the same name as the one in the placeholder, and select it.  Type the alternate text, and then click “OK” to relink the image, and then “OK” again to return to the question list.&lt;br /&gt;
See also: [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=102072] and [http://www.screencast.com/t/zydIQ55f&lt;br /&gt;
]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Old formats===&lt;br /&gt;
*AON -This format is the same as the missing word format, except it creates matching questions from the multiple choice questions. Please note that from Moodle 1.8 it will no longer be part of the standard Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Character encoding ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is important that the imported file is encoded in the [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/UTF-8 UTF-8] standard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this is not adhered to you may get import errors and/or strange characters in the imported materials. If the file is not UTF-8, an external tool must be used to change the encoding. Note that if only basic &#039;latin&#039; characters are used, then the coding issue can generally be ignored. Be particularly careful when creating questions using Microsoft Word. For reasons best known to themselves, Microsoft used their own encoding for some characters (incompatible with UTF-8) and this is likely to break the import.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;If you are having problems with the first question (or category modifier) in the file being misinterpreted (this particularly applies to GIFT format) it might be your editor adding a &amp;quot;Byte-Order-Mark&amp;quot; character at the beginning of the file. This is particularly common in Windows programs (e.g. Notepad) and is another good reason to steer clear of Microsoft products for text editing (as apposed to word processing). There are plenty of free or low cost text editors available for download. The BOM is neither recommended or required as UTF8 does not have [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Byte-order_mark byte order issues].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Match grades==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Imported grades must &#039;&#039;&#039;exactly&#039;&#039;&#039; match one of the fixed list of valid grades, as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 100, 90, 80, 75, 70, 66.666, 60, 50, 40, 33.333, 30, 25, 20, 16.666, 14.2857, 12.5, 11.111, 10, 5, 0&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
negative values of the above list are also permitted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two settings for this switch. They affect how the import routine treats values that do not exactly match one of the values in the above list&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Error if grade not listed - If a question contains any grades not found in the list an error is displayed and that question will not be imported.&lt;br /&gt;
* Nearest grade if not listed - If a grade is found that does not match a value in the list, the grade is changed to the closest matching value in the list&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: some custom import formats write directly to the database and may bypass this check.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tips and tricks==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;TIP:&#039;&#039; It may be easier and faster to type many questions into a &#039;&#039;&#039;single text file&#039;&#039;&#039;, than to create a series of Quiz or Lesson question pages.  Some teachers report that once they master creating questions in one of the formats to import, they do not have to wait for their Moodle site screen to refresh and the process of selecting the next question type to create.   &lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;TIP:&#039;&#039; Want to use questions from your quiz in a &#039;&#039;&#039;Lesson&#039;&#039;&#039;?  Export the question category in say a GIFT format, then use a text editor to delete questions, or perhaps use a search and replace function to change names or places.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://vletools.com Moodle XML Converter] Convert your questions online into Moodle XML format. Allows to create questions from existing textfiles that should to be preformatted in a simple way. Supports TeX formulas, HTML and image embedded questions. Also can generate *.txt file from Moodle XML in case you need to export your questions in textfile.   &lt;br /&gt;
* The help button link next to the import file button gives a lot of detail about each format in a popup window.&lt;br /&gt;
* Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=51316 escaping problem in gift import?] forum discussion&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Converting files to UTF-8]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Import and export FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/user.php?id=726938&amp;amp;course=5 Eoin Campbell is working on a XSLT based import/export module for Word] - stay tuned! &lt;br /&gt;
*[http://www.moodle2word.net website for converting Moodle Questions into tables in a Microsoft Word file, and vice versa].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Fragen importieren]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[eu:Galderak_inportatu]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Importer des questions]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:問題のインポート]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tjuly</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=GIFT_format&amp;diff=82250</id>
		<title>GIFT format</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=GIFT_format&amp;diff=82250"/>
		<updated>2011-03-24T20:05:13Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tjuly: /* Word processors and Spreadsheets tools that create GIFTs */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;GIFT format&#039;&#039;&#039; allows someone to use a text editor to write multiple-choice, true-false, short answer, matching missing word and numerical questions in a simple format that can be imported. The GIFT format is also an export file format available in Question bank. The format has been developed within the Moodle Community but other software may support it to a greater or lesser degree.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*When creating a large numbers of questions, GIFT can provide a quick way of bulk loading questions either into a [[Question bank|question category]], or into a [[Adding_a_question_page#Importing_questions|Lesson]]. &lt;br /&gt;
*Sometimes it is easier proofing questions in a question category by viewing them in a GIFT file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== General instructions ==&lt;br /&gt;
At least one blank line must be left between each question. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the simple form, the question comes first, then the answers are set in between brackets, with an equal sign indicating the correct answer(s) and tilde the wrong answers.  A Number sign will insert a response.  Questions can be weighted by placing percentage signs around the weight.  Comments are preceded by double slashes and are not imported.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here are some useful [http://moodle.org/file.php/5/moddata/forum/121/236161/GIFT-examples.zip GIFT examples] than can be imported or used as rough template.  Many of the examples below used the questions in the file as a starting point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== UTF-8 encoding ===&lt;br /&gt;
Any GIFT file &#039;&#039;&#039;must&#039;&#039;&#039; be correctly encoded in [[UTF8]]. You can use Microsoft&#039;s text editor Notepad which comes with Windows to save your file in UTF-8. &#039;&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039;&#039;: ANSI format will (only) work for languages without any special characters (like ä, ö, ü, æ, å, ø, œ or ß). And don&#039;t use &amp;quot;Unicode&amp;quot; as format as this is actually UTF-16 and won&#039;t work. See [[Converting files to UTF-8]] for further information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Format symbols===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here are some common GIFT symbols and their use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
! Symbols !! Use&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| // text || Comment until end of line (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ::title:: || Question title (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| text || Question text (becomes title if no title specified)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [...format...] || The format of the following bit of text. Options are [html], [moodle], [plain] and [markdown]. The default is [moodle] for the question text, other parts of the question default to the format used for the question text.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| { || Start answer(s) -- without any answers, text is a description of following questions&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| {T} or {F} || True or False answer; also {TRUE} and {FALSE}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| { ... =right ... } || Correct answer for multiple choice, (multiple answer? -- see page comments) or fill-in-the-blank&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| { ... ~wrong ... } || Incorrect answer for multiple choice or multiple answer&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| { ... =item -&amp;gt; match ... } || Answer for matching questions&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| #feedback text || Answer feedback for preceding multiple, fill-in-the-blank, or numeric answers&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| {# || Start numeric answer(s)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| answer:tolerance || Numeric answer accepted within ± tolerance range&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| low..high || Lower and upper range values of accepted numeric answer &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| =%n%answer:tolerance || n percent credit for one of multiple numeric ranges within tolerance from answer&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| } || End answer(s)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| \character || Backslash escapes the special meaning of ~, =, #, {, }, and :&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| \n || Places a newline in question text -- blank lines delimit questions&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here are some quick examples:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // true/false&lt;br /&gt;
 ::Q1:: 1+1=2 {T}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 // multiple choice with specified feedback for right and wrong answers&lt;br /&gt;
 ::Q2:: What&#039;s between orange and green in the spectrum? &lt;br /&gt;
 { =yellow # right; good! ~red # wrong, it&#039;s yellow ~blue # wrong, it&#039;s yellow }&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 // fill-in-the-blank&lt;br /&gt;
 ::Q3:: Two plus {=two =2} equals four.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 // matching&lt;br /&gt;
 ::Q4:: Which animal eats which food? { =cat -&amp;gt; cat food =dog -&amp;gt; dog food }&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 // math range question&lt;br /&gt;
 ::Q5:: What is a number from 1 to 5? {#3:2}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 // math range specified with interval end points&lt;br /&gt;
 ::Q6:: What is a number from 1 to 5? {#1..5}&lt;br /&gt;
 // translated on import to the same as Q5, but unavailable from Moodle question interface&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 // multiple numeric answers with partial credit and feedback&lt;br /&gt;
 ::Q7:: When was Ulysses S. Grant born? {#&lt;br /&gt;
          =1822:0      # Correct! Full credit.&lt;br /&gt;
          =%50%1822:2  # He was born in 1822. Half credit for being close.&lt;br /&gt;
 }&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 // essay&lt;br /&gt;
 ::Q8:: How are you? {}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Format symbols explained===&lt;br /&gt;
The multiple choice format below as a comment line // for the question, when Moodle exports it the question unique id number will appear here.  The first set of  :: precedes the question title. The second :: precedes the actual question. The first { indicates the start of the answers.  The correct answer is preceded by an = sign and wrong answers by a ~.  Teacher responses have a # in front of them.  The question ends with a } and then a blank line. NOTE it is { } not ( ) parenthesis! Usually these are gotten with help of the [AltGr] key.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 //Comment line &lt;br /&gt;
 ::Question title &lt;br /&gt;
 :: Question {&lt;br /&gt;
 =A correct answer&lt;br /&gt;
 ~Wrong answer1&lt;br /&gt;
 #A response to wrong answer1&lt;br /&gt;
 ~Wrong answer2&lt;br /&gt;
 #A response to wrong answer2&lt;br /&gt;
 ~Wrong answer3&lt;br /&gt;
 #A response to wrong answer3&lt;br /&gt;
 ~Wrong answer4&lt;br /&gt;
 #A response to wrong answer4&lt;br /&gt;
 }&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The shortest format for a multiple choice question is:&lt;br /&gt;
 Question{= A Correct Answer ~Wrong answer1 ~Wrong answer2 ~Wrong answer3 ~Wrong answer4 }&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;Tip:&#039;&#039; If you don&#039;t specify a question title the WHOLE question will be used as the title at the time of import into Moodle. There are pros and cons to allowing this to happen. Cons: This can add a lot of unnecessary words. This can include characters which might confuse the export GIFT process.  Pros: On the other hand. if the start of each question is different, it can make finding a single question easier in a category list of questions. It will save you typing.  Having the same title for every question is a very bad idea.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Question format examples==&lt;br /&gt;
There are several ways to use a text editor to write a GIFT format.  We will try to show the simple version for example and in some formats we will introduce some more complex features that can be imported into many Moodle Question formats.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Multiple choice===&lt;br /&gt;
For multiple choice questions, wrong answers are prefixed with a tilde (~) and the correct answer is prefixed with an equal sign (=).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is a simple acceptable GIFT multiple choice format:&lt;br /&gt;
 Who&#039;s buried in Grant&#039;s tomb?{=Grant ~no one ~Napoleon ~Churchill ~Mother Teresa }&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is a longer format that uses most of the GIFT elements:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  // question: 1 name: Grants tomb&lt;br /&gt;
 ::Grants tomb::Who is buried in Grant&#039;s tomb in New York City? {&lt;br /&gt;
 =Grant&lt;br /&gt;
 ~No one&lt;br /&gt;
 #Was true for 12 years, but Grant&#039;s remains were buried in the tomb in 1897&lt;br /&gt;
 ~Napoleon&lt;br /&gt;
 #He was buried in France&lt;br /&gt;
 ~Churchill&lt;br /&gt;
 #He was buried in England&lt;br /&gt;
 ~Mother Teresa&lt;br /&gt;
 #She was buried in India&lt;br /&gt;
 }&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Multiple choice with multiple right answers===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That is, using checkboxes, not radio buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 What two people are entombed in Grant&#039;s tomb? {&lt;br /&gt;
    ~%-100%No one&lt;br /&gt;
    ~%50%Grant&lt;br /&gt;
    ~%50%Grant&#039;s wife&lt;br /&gt;
    ~%-100%Grant&#039;s father&lt;br /&gt;
 }&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===True-false===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this question-type the answer indicates whether the statement is true or false. The answer should be written as {TRUE} or {FALSE}, or abbreviated to {T} or {F}.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // question: 0 name: TrueStatement using {T} style&lt;br /&gt;
 ::TrueStatement about Grant::Grant was buried in a tomb in New York City.{T}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 // question: 0 name: FalseStatement using {FALSE} style&lt;br /&gt;
 ::FalseStatement about sun::The sun rises in the West.{FALSE}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Short answer===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Answers in Short Answer question-type are all prefixed by an equal sign (=), indicating that they are all correct answers. The answers must not contain a tilde.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here are two examples using the simple method showing possible right answers for credit.&lt;br /&gt;
 Who&#039;s buried in Grant&#039;s tomb?{=Grant =Ulysses S. Grant =Ulysses Grant}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Two plus two equals {=four =4}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If there is only one correct Short Answer, it may be written without the equal sign prefix, as long as it cannot be confused as True-False.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Matching===&lt;br /&gt;
Matching pairs begin with an equal sign (=) and are separated by this symbol &amp;quot;-&amp;gt;&amp;quot;. There must be at least three matching pairs.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 Match the following countries with their corresponding capitals. {&lt;br /&gt;
    =Canada -&amp;gt; Ottawa&lt;br /&gt;
    =Italy  -&amp;gt; Rome&lt;br /&gt;
    =Japan  -&amp;gt; Tokyo&lt;br /&gt;
    =India  -&amp;gt; New Delhi&lt;br /&gt;
    }&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Matching questions do not support feedback or percentage answer weights.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Missing word===&lt;br /&gt;
The Missing Word format automatically inserts a fill-in-the-blank line (like this _____) in the middle of the sentence. To use the Missing Word format, place the answers where you want the line to appear in the sentence.&lt;br /&gt;
 Moodle costd{~lots of money =nothing ~a small amount} to download from moodle.org.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the answers come before the closing punctuation mark, a fill-in-the-blank line will be inserted for the &amp;quot;missing word&amp;quot; format. All question types can be written in the Missing Word format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There must be a blank line (double carriage return) separating questions. For clarity, the answers can be written on separate lines and even indented. Some examples:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Mahatma Gandhi birthday is an Indian holiday on  {&lt;br /&gt;
 ~15th&lt;br /&gt;
 ~3rd&lt;br /&gt;
 =2nd&lt;br /&gt;
 } of October.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 Since {&lt;br /&gt;
   ~495 AD&lt;br /&gt;
   =1066 AD&lt;br /&gt;
   ~1215 AD&lt;br /&gt;
   ~ 43 AD&lt;br /&gt;
 }&lt;br /&gt;
 the town of Hastings England has been &amp;quot;famous with visitors&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Numerical questions===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The answer section for Numerical questions must start with a number sign (#). Numerical answers can include an error margin, which is written following the correct answer, separated by a colon. So for example, if the correct answer is anything between 1.5 and 2.5, then it would be written as follows {#2:0.5}. This indicates that 2 with an error margin of 0.5 is correct (i.e., the span from 1.5 to 2.5). If no error margin is specified, it will be assumed to be zero.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is a simple numerical format question. It will accept a range of 5 years.&lt;br /&gt;
 When was Ulysses S. Grant born?{#1822:5}&lt;br /&gt;
It is a good idea to check the margins of the range, 3.141 is not counted as correct and 3.142 is considered in the range. &lt;br /&gt;
 What is the value of pi (to 3 decimal places)? {#3.14159:0.0005}.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Optionally, numerical answers can be written as a span in the following format {#MinimumValue..MaximumValue}.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 What is the value of pi (to 3 decimal places)? {#3.141..3.142}.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle&#039;s browser interface does not support multiple numerical answers, but Moodle&#039;s code can and so does GIFT. This can be used to specify numerical multiple spans, and can be particularly usefully when combined with percentage weight grades. If multiple answers are used, they must be separated by an equal sign, like short answer questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 When was Ulysses S. Grant born? {#&lt;br /&gt;
    =1822:0&lt;br /&gt;
    =%50%1822:2&lt;br /&gt;
 }&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that since Moodle&#039;s browser GUI didn&#039;t support multiple answers for Numerical questions, there&#039;s no way in older Moodle versions to see them or edit them through Moodle. The only way to change a numerical answer beyond the first, is to delete the question and re-import it (or use something like phpMyAdmin). But better would be to upgrade your Moodle to at least 1.9.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Essay===&lt;br /&gt;
An essay question is simply a question with an empty answer field. Nothing is permitted between the curly braces at all.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Write a short biography of Dag Hammarskjöld. {}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Description===&lt;br /&gt;
A description &amp;quot;question&amp;quot; has no answer part at all&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 You can use your pencil and paper for these next math questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Options==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition to these basic question types, this filter offers the following options: line comments, question name, feedback and percentage answer weight.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Line Comments===&lt;br /&gt;
Comments that will not be imported into Moodle can be included in the text file. This can be used to provide headers or more information about questions. All lines that start with a double backslash (not counting tabs or spaces) will be ignored by the filter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Subheading: Numerical questions below&lt;br /&gt;
 What&#039;s 2 plus 2? {#4}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Comments will be exported from Moodle and will include the unique question id.  The above question after it was imported and then exported from Moodle:&lt;br /&gt;
 // question: 914  name: What&#039;s 2 plus 2? &lt;br /&gt;
 ::What&#039;s 2 plus 2?::What&#039;s 2 plus 2?{#&lt;br /&gt;
     =4:0#&lt;br /&gt;
 }&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Question Name===&lt;br /&gt;
A question name can be specified by placing it first and enclosing it within double colons.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 ::Kanji Origins::Japanese characters originally&lt;br /&gt;
 came from what country? {=China}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 ::Thanksgiving Date::The American holiday of Thanksgiving is &lt;br /&gt;
 celebrated on the {~second ~third =fourth} Thursday of November.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If no question name is specified, the entire question will be used as the name by default.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Feedback===&lt;br /&gt;
Feedback can be included for each answer by following the answer with a number sign (# also known as a hash mark) and the feedback.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 What&#039;s the answer to this multiple-choice question? {&lt;br /&gt;
   ~wrong answer#feedback comment on the wrong answer&lt;br /&gt;
   ~another wrong answer#feedback comment on this wrong answer&lt;br /&gt;
   =right answer#Very good!&lt;br /&gt;
 }&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
 //From The Hitchhiker&#039;s Guide to the Galaxy&lt;br /&gt;
 Deep Thought said &amp;quot; {&lt;br /&gt;
   =forty two#Correct according to The Hitchhiker&#039;s Guide to the Galaxy!&lt;br /&gt;
   =42#Correct, as told to Loonquawl and Phouchg&lt;br /&gt;
   =forty-two#Correct!&lt;br /&gt;
 }  is the Ultimate Answer to the Ultimate Question of Life, The Universe, and Everything.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
    42 is the Absolute Answer to everything.{&lt;br /&gt;
 FALSE#42is the Ultimate Answer.#You gave the right answer.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For Multiple Choice questions, feedback is displayed only for the answer the student selected. For short answer, feedback is shown only when students input the corresponding correct answer. For true-false questions, there can be one or two feedback strings. The first is shown if the student gives the wrong answer. The second if the student gives the right answer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Percentage Answer Weights===&lt;br /&gt;
Percentage answer weights are available for both Multiple Choice and Short Answer questions. Percentage answer weights can be included by following the tilde (for Multiple Choice) or equal sign (for Short Answer) with the desired percent enclosed within percent signs (e.g., %50%). This option can be combined with feedback comments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Difficult question.{~wrong answer ~%50%half credit answer =full credit answer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 ::Jesus&#039; hometown::Jesus Christ was from {&lt;br /&gt;
    ~Jerusalem#This was an important city, but the wrong answer.&lt;br /&gt;
    ~%25%Bethlehem#He was born here, but not raised here.&lt;br /&gt;
    ~%50%Galilee#You need to be more specific.&lt;br /&gt;
    =Nazareth#Yes! That&#039;s right!&lt;br /&gt;
 }.&lt;br /&gt;
     &lt;br /&gt;
 ::Jesus&#039; hometown:: Jesus Christ was from {&lt;br /&gt;
    =Nazareth#Yes! That&#039;s right!&lt;br /&gt;
    =%75%Nazereth#Right, but misspelled.&lt;br /&gt;
    =%25%Bethlehem#He was born here, but not raised here.&lt;br /&gt;
 }&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that the last two examples are essentially the same question, first as multiple choice and then as short answer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that it is possible to specify percentage answer weights that are NOT available through the browser interface. The Match Grades drop-down on the import page determines how these are handled. You can either request that an error be reported or that the answer weight be adjusted to the nearest valid answer weight.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specify text-formatting for the question&lt;br /&gt;
The question text (only) may have an optional text format specified. Currently the available formats are moodle (Moodle Auto-Format), html (HTML format), plain (Plain text format) and markdown (Markdown format). The format is specified in square brackets immediately before the question text. See [[Formatting text]] for further information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 [markdown]The *American holiday of Thanksgiving* is celebrated on the {&lt;br /&gt;
    ~second&lt;br /&gt;
    ~third&lt;br /&gt;
    =fourth&lt;br /&gt;
 } Thursday of November.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Multiple Answers===&lt;br /&gt;
The Multiple Answers option is used for multiple choice questions when two or more answers must be selected in order to obtain full credit. The multiple answers option is enabled by assigning partial answer weight to multiple answers, while allowing no single answer to receive full credit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 What two people are entombed in Grant&#039;s tomb? {&lt;br /&gt;
    ~No one&lt;br /&gt;
    ~%50%Grant&lt;br /&gt;
    ~%50%Grant&#039;s wife&lt;br /&gt;
    ~Grant&#039;s father&lt;br /&gt;
 }&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that there is no equal sign (=) in any answer and the answers should total no more than 100%, otherwise Moodle will return an error. To avoid the problem of students automatically getting 100% by simply checking all of the answers, it is best to include negative answer weights for wrong answers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 What two people are entombed in Grant&#039;s tomb? {&lt;br /&gt;
    ~%-50%No one&lt;br /&gt;
    ~%50%Grant&lt;br /&gt;
    ~%50%Grant&#039;s wife&lt;br /&gt;
    ~%-50%Grant&#039;s father&lt;br /&gt;
 }&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Special Characters ~ = # { }===&lt;br /&gt;
These symbols ~ = # { } : control the operation of this filter and cannot be used as normal text within questions. Since these symbols have a special role in determining the operation of this filter, they are called &amp;quot;control characters.&amp;quot; But sometimes you may want to use one of these characters, for example to show a mathematical formula in a question. The way to get around this problem is &amp;quot;escaping&amp;quot; the control characters. This means simply putting a backslash (\) before a control character so the filter will know that you want to use it as a literal character instead of as a control character. For example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Which answer equals 5? {&lt;br /&gt;
    ~ \= 2 + 2&lt;br /&gt;
    = \= 2 + 3&lt;br /&gt;
    ~ \= 2 + 4&lt;br /&gt;
 }&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 ::GIFT Control Characters::&lt;br /&gt;
 Which of the following is NOT a control character for the GIFT import format? {&lt;br /&gt;
   ~ \~     # \~ is a control character.&lt;br /&gt;
   ~ \=     # \= is a control character.&lt;br /&gt;
   ~ \#     # \# is a control character.&lt;br /&gt;
   ~ \{     # \{ is a control character.&lt;br /&gt;
   ~ \}     # \} is a control character.&lt;br /&gt;
   = \      # Correct! \ (backslash) is not a control character. BUT,&lt;br /&gt;
              it is used to escape the control characters.&lt;br /&gt;
 }&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the question is processed, the backslash is removed and is not saved in Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Specifying Categories===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to change the category into which the questions are added within the GIFT file. You can change the category as many times as you wish within the file. All questions after the modifier up to the next modifier or the end of the file will be added to the specified category. Up to the first category modifier the category specified on the import screen will be used. Note that for this to work the from file: box must be ticked on the import screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To include a category modifier include a line like this (with a blank line before and after):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 $CATEGORY: tom/dick/harry&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
or simply&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 $CATEGORY: mycategory&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
...the first example specifies a path of nested categories. In this case the questions will go into harry. The categories are created if they do not exist.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Making questions case sensitive===&lt;br /&gt;
Short Answer questions can be made case sensitive by changing &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; to &amp;quot;1&amp;quot; in the following line:&lt;br /&gt;
 $question-&amp;gt;usecase = 0; // Ignore case&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Hints and Tips==&lt;br /&gt;
* Use the ::title:: at the beginning of every question to organize your questions when Moodle presents a list or exports them as another GIFT file.  When the title is left blank, Moodle will put the beginning of the question as the title. Some teachers want to see something like &amp;quot;001 LIT101 Poe ref Purloin Letter&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;The Purloin Letter was written by (AmLit pg 254)&amp;quot; in the title.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* You can specify markup if you need to format the question by setting [html], [moodle], [plain] or [markdown] just before the question text. See more about this in the reference pdf below.&lt;br /&gt;
* In the Lesson module, in a question page, correct answers jump by default to Next page and incorrect answers jump to This page (i.e. student has to &amp;quot;try again&amp;quot;). When importing from a GIFT format file, this is exactly the mechanism which is used.&lt;br /&gt;
* If you want a student to be taken directly from one question to the next irrespective of their answer being correct or incorrect: in the Lesson Settings, set Maximum number of attempts: to 1. &lt;br /&gt;
**Please note, however, that a message &amp;quot;correct / incorrect&amp;quot; will still be displayed to the student upon answering each question. If you do not want this (default) feedback message to be displayed then enter your own feedback message (i.e. &amp;quot;continue&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;---&amp;quot;, etc.) &lt;br /&gt;
**In case you want no visible message displayed then enter a non-breaking space as feedback. Moodle will not put it&#039;s automatic response because it sees the blank space. To do this, put a # after the answer and write [[Image:Nbsp.png]] (without spaces between these characters). &lt;br /&gt;
* Need to use a special GIFT character in your question or answer?  Put a \ in front of the GIFT character.  &lt;br /&gt;
**For example if you want to use curly braces, { or }, or equal sign, =, or # or ~ in a GIFT file (in a math question including TeX expressions) you must &amp;quot;escape&amp;quot; them by preceding them with a \ directly in front of each { or } or =. It is possible to use a replace program/macro/editor filter to do this conversion before importing to Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
* Want to change T/F type questions to multiple choice? Consider exporting the T/F questions as a GIFT file, then using a text editor to replace the (T) with (=True ~False). Perhaps change the title slightly so you will recognize the new questions.&lt;br /&gt;
* Alphabetic case-sensitive comparison is disabled by default. If you need case-sensitive comparison for short answer questions (an unusual need), precede them with:&lt;br /&gt;
   $question-&amp;gt;usecase = 1;&lt;br /&gt;
surrounded by blank lines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Word processors and Spreadsheets tools that create GIFTs==&lt;br /&gt;
Several contributors have used macros to generate GIFT files from a more familiar popular programs.   &lt;br /&gt;
* There are Word macros available for easily creating GIFT files. See [http://www.moodleschool.co.nz/mod/resource/view.php?id=83 Moodle4Teachers] for downloads and instructions for use.&lt;br /&gt;
* There are several Excel spreadsheets for generating GIFT files. Several people have built upon other contributors work.  &lt;br /&gt;
**The latest version was posted on 10 April 2007 and can be found in this thread with this file name: [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=66660 Excel2GIFTv1.1.zip by Timothy Takemoto].  There is also a set of instructions Excel2GIFTv1.1_Instructions.rtf by Jeff Shek on the same day in that thread.&lt;br /&gt;
** [http://video.google.com/videoplay?docid=-6612645502883459334# video tutorial] for using Excel2GIFTv2.xls &lt;br /&gt;
**An earlier version of this Excel spreadsheet for generating multiple choice GIFT files [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=45245 initially created by Olga Forlani and improved by A. T. Wyatt].&lt;br /&gt;
*There are Open Office templates for generating GIFT files in Writer.  These are located in the Quiz forum in the[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=20705&amp;amp;parent=168385 OOo template to write exams and convert to GIFT format thread].&lt;br /&gt;
**The most recent for OO 2.x is &amp;quot;OOo2GIFT_Template_05.zip&amp;quot; postes 17 December 2005 by Enrique Castro.&lt;br /&gt;
**An earlier version is &amp;quot;GIFT_template_OOo.zip&amp;quot; posted 22 March 2005 by Enrique Castro.&lt;br /&gt;
*There is an easy to use on line multiple question generator at [http://a4esl.org/c/qw.html  a4esl.org]. Here you write your question(s) without formating marks, select Moodle and press the generate quiz button.  This creates GIFT formatted text that can be pasted into a file for importing into Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
**The initial format requires fewer keystrokes (it uses line position and returns) than the GIFT format, so you should save time and be less likely to create invalid data.&lt;br /&gt;
** Quiz authoring template for Microsoft Word [http://moodle.org/mod/data/view.php?d=13&amp;amp;rid=578 link]&lt;br /&gt;
** Moodle XML Converter [http://vletools.com]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Here is a 2-column PDF [http://buypct.com/gift_reference.pdf GIFT Reference Sheet]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Export questions]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Import questions]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Import and export FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Aiken Format]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Moodle XML format]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==External links==&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://www.kingsley.k12.mi.us/documents/gift_format.pdf Formatting quizzes in GIFT format]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://en.wikiversity.org/wiki/Google_Summer_of_Code_2010_Proposal:_GIFT_Conversion Google Summer of Code 2010 Proposal: GIFT Conversion] (Wikiversity)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Questions]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:GIFT]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Format GIFT]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:GIFTフォーマット]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tjuly</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Moodle_XML_format&amp;diff=82249</id>
		<title>Moodle XML format</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Moodle_XML_format&amp;diff=82249"/>
		<updated>2011-03-24T20:03:51Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tjuly: /* Useful utilities */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;The XML Format is a Moodle-specific format for importing and exporting questions to be used with the [[Quiz module]]. The format has been developed within the Moodle Community but other software may support it to a greater or lesser degree.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==A word about validity (and CDATA)==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The XML parser assumes that the XML file is well formed and does not detect or report errors. If it is not you are very likely to get unexpected errors. If you are hand-coding the XML file it is strongly recommended that you pass it through some sort of XML verifier before importing into Moodle. A simple way to do this is to open the XML file using Firefox or Internet Explorer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note particularly that embedded HTML fragments should be within [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/CDATA CDATA sections]. CDATA example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code xml&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;questiontext format=&amp;quot;html&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
       &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;&amp;lt;![CDATA[&lt;br /&gt;
              Now I can include &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;any&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; HTML that I&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
              wish. Without the CDATA, the &amp;lt;i&amp;gt;HTML&amp;lt;/i&amp;gt; tags would break&lt;br /&gt;
              the XML!!&lt;br /&gt;
              ]]&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/questiontext&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Overall structure of XML file==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The file is enclosed by tags as follows. It is &#039;&#039;&#039;important&#039;&#039;&#039; to make sure the xml-line is really the first line of the file. A blank first line turns your otherwise compliant file into a source of frustration. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code xml&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;?xml version=&amp;quot;1.0&amp;quot; ?&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;quiz&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 .&lt;br /&gt;
 .&lt;br /&gt;
 .&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/quiz&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within the &amp;lt;quiz&amp;gt; tags are any number of &amp;lt;question&amp;gt; tags. One of these &amp;lt;question&amp;gt; tags can be a dummy question with a &#039;&#039;category&#039;&#039; type to specify a category for the import/export. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code xml&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;question type=&amp;quot;category&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;category&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;$course$/XXXX&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/category&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/question&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Where XXXX is the new category name. If the category exists, the question(s) will be added to the existing course; otherwise a new category will be created. This only works if you have &amp;quot;Get category from file&amp;quot; checked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Multiple categories can be specified in the same file. Just add another dummy &#039;category&#039; question each time you would like to establish a new category and the questions that follow it will be placed there.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The file must be encoded in [[UTF8]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle XML import and export are balanced in functionality, so if you need to understand the format you can simply create some questions and export them to see what it looks like.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tags common to all question types==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A question is written as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code xml&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;question type=&amp;quot;multichoice|truefalse|shortanswer|matching|cloze|essay|numerical|description&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;name&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
         &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;Name of question&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;/name&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;questiontext format=&amp;quot;html&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
         &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;What is the answer to this question?&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;/questiontext&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     .&lt;br /&gt;
     .&lt;br /&gt;
     .&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/question&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Format&amp;quot; selects the [[Formatting options]] for the question text. The options are &#039;&#039;&#039;moodle_auto_format&#039;&#039;&#039; (the default), &#039;&#039;&#039;html&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;plain_text&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;markdown&#039;&#039;&#039;. The choice effects the way in which the text will be displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Further tags, which usually include at least one &amp;lt;answer&amp;gt; tag, follow in the space marked with dots as child nodes to the &amp;lt;question&amp;gt; tag. The response-related tags are listed further down on this page. Various (optional?) tags are possible. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* penalty&lt;br /&gt;
* generalfeedback&lt;br /&gt;
* defaultgrade&lt;br /&gt;
* hidden&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;image&amp;gt; tag contains the url of any included image. Nested within the &amp;lt;image&amp;gt; tag may be an &amp;lt;image_base64&amp;gt; tag which contains the actual image data encoded in base64 [http://www.php.net/manual/en/function.base64-encode.php].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;In the following question type examples the common parts of the question are not shown to improve clarity. It&#039;s a good idea to export some examples yourself to see a full example.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Multiple choice==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MC questions have one &amp;lt;answer&amp;gt; tag for each choice. Each choice can carry feedback and score weighting (by using the fraction attribute). In addition, an MC question has the following tags:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* single &#039;&#039;(values: true/false)&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* shuffleanswers &#039;&#039;(values: 1/0)&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* correctfeedback &lt;br /&gt;
* partiallycorrectfeedback &lt;br /&gt;
* incorrectfeedback&lt;br /&gt;
* answernumbering (allowed values: &#039;none&#039;, &#039;abc&#039;, &#039;ABCD&#039; or &#039;123&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;single&amp;gt; tag is used to distinguish single response (radio button) and multiple response (checkbox) variants.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code xml&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;question type=&amp;quot;multichoice&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;answer fraction=&amp;quot;100&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;The correct answer&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;feedback&amp;gt;&amp;lt;text&amp;gt;Correct!&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/feedback&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/answer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;answer fraction=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;A distractor&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;feedback&amp;gt;&amp;lt;text&amp;gt;Ooops!&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/feedback&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/answer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;answer fraction=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;Another distractor&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;feedback&amp;gt;&amp;lt;text&amp;gt;Ooops!&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/feedback&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/answer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;shuffleanswers&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/shuffleanswers&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;single&amp;gt;true&amp;lt;/single&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;answernumbering&amp;gt;abc&amp;lt;/answernumbering&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== True/false ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Two answer tags are given, one which is true, and one which is false. The fraction attribute of the answer tag identifies which option is correct (100) and which is false (0). Feedback is supported. The following example shows the format when true is the correct answer and false is wrong.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code xml&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;question type=&amp;quot;truefalse&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;answer fraction=&amp;quot;100&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;true&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;feedback&amp;gt;&amp;lt;text&amp;gt;Correct!&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/feedback&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/answer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;answer fraction=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;false&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;feedback&amp;gt;&amp;lt;text&amp;gt;Ooops!&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/feedback&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/answer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Short answer  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The short answer question type supports alternative correct responses, each with its own weighting and feedback.  The Moodle XML format uses one &amp;lt;answer&amp;gt; tag for each of the alternative correct answers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;usecase&amp;gt; tag toggles case-sensitivity with the values 1/0. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code xml&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;question type=&amp;quot;shortanswer&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;answer fraction=&amp;quot;100&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;The correct answer&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;feedback&amp;gt;&amp;lt;text&amp;gt;Correct!&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/feedback&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/answer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;question type=&amp;quot;shortanswer&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;answer fraction=&amp;quot;100&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;The correct answer&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;feedback&amp;gt;&amp;lt;text&amp;gt;Correct!&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/feedback&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/answer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;answer fraction=&amp;quot;100&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;An alternative answer&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;feedback&amp;gt;&amp;lt;text&amp;gt;Correct!&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/feedback&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/answer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Numerical response ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following is a simplified version of the Moodle XML format for numerical responses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code xml&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;question type=&amp;quot;numerical&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;answer fraction=&amp;quot;100&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;23&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;feedback&amp;gt;&amp;lt;text&amp;gt;Feedback&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/feedback&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/answer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle also supports a &amp;lt;tolerance&amp;gt; tag (how accurate must the number be?) and one or more &amp;lt;unit&amp;gt; tags. Unit tags have names and multipliers. E.g. if the main answer is in kilometres, an additional answer could be the equivalent in metres with a multiplier of 1000.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; prior to 1.7.2 the fraction was expressed as a value between 0 and 1 in a &amp;lt;fraction&amp;gt; element and the answer value was &#039;&#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039;&#039; enclosed in &amp;lt;text&amp;gt; tags. This format of the numerical question type is deprecated but will still be correctly imported if found (for now).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Matching ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pair matching responses use the &amp;lt;shuffleanswers&amp;gt; tag to determine whether the order of the items should be randomized.&lt;br /&gt;
Each pair is contained inside a &amp;lt;subquestion&amp;gt; tag. The first item of each pair is contained with a &amp;lt;text&amp;gt; tag, while the second has an &amp;lt;answer&amp;gt; tag around it as well. Feedback and score weighting is not supported by Moodle for this response type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code xml&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;question type=&amp;quot;matching&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;subquestion&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;This is the 1st item in the 1st pair.&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;answer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
         &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;This is the 2nd item in the 1st pair.&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;/answer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/subquestion&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;subquestion&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;This is the 1st item in the 2nd pair.&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;answer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
         &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;This is the 2nd item in the 2nd pair.&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;/answer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/subquestion&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;shuffleanswers&amp;gt;true&amp;lt;/shuffleanswers&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Essay ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An example of the essay type question...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code xml&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;question type=&amp;quot;essay&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;answer fraction=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/answer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;/question&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There isn&#039;t an answer and there isn&#039;t a grade in this case. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; prior to 1.7.2 the fraction was expressed as a value between 0 and 1 in a &amp;lt;fraction&amp;gt; element and the answer value was &#039;&#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039;&#039; enclosed in &amp;lt;text&amp;gt; tags. This format of the essay question type is deprecated but will still be correctly imported if found (for now).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Other question types ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Cloze ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is supported, and depends on a special format for the &amp;lt;questiontext&amp;gt; tag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Description response type===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This response type has no further tags other than those contained in the question header (such as &amp;lt;questiontext&amp;gt;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Random matching ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle has a question type which consists of taking short answer questions in the same quiz and displaying them as a pair matching exercise. However Moodle is neither able to export nor import this question type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Useful utilities==&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://vletools.com Online Moodle XML converter] Convert from existing text files glossaries and quizzes to Moodle XML format. Also can convert from Moodle XMl to text. &lt;br /&gt;
*[http://finemetronome.com/moodle/ Word Template for generating Moodle XML].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.qedoc.org/en/index.php?title=Moodle_XML_format Quedoc&#039;s Moodle XML documentation]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle Docs&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Export questions]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Import questions]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[GIFT format]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Aiken format]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[XML FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Import and export FAQ]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Questions]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:Moodle XMLフォーマット]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de: Moodle XML-Format]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tjuly</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Import_glossary_entries&amp;diff=81320</id>
		<title>Import glossary entries</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Import_glossary_entries&amp;diff=81320"/>
		<updated>2011-02-15T19:19:25Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tjuly: /* Importing tools */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Glossaries}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Importing entries==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To import glossary entries via an XML file:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Follow the &amp;quot;Import entries&amp;quot; link at the top right of the main glossary page.&lt;br /&gt;
#Browse for the exported entries XML file on your computer.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the destination for the new entries, either the current glossary or a new one.&lt;br /&gt;
#If you want to import category information, click the checkbox.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the &amp;quot;Save changes&amp;quot; button. You&#039;ll then see a report of the entries and categories added to the glossary. If you enabled duplicate entries when you created the glossary, the import process will add all of the new definitions. Otherwise, it will not allow you to import any duplicate entries.&lt;br /&gt;
#see below about different tools and programs to create XML file from your glossary&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Troubleshooting ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Possible causes of problems importing entries:&lt;br /&gt;
* If there are mistakes in the XML file such as the &amp;lt;entries&amp;gt; tag being missing or the &amp;lt;info&amp;gt; tag being in the wrong place. May happen if you have constructed the XML file manually or with some sort of tool like mailmerge in Word and your template is wrong.&lt;br /&gt;
* If there are top bit set characters in the text of the entities like concepts, definitions or keywords. Replace things like &amp;amp; with &amp;amp;amp;amp;&lt;br /&gt;
* If there are tabs or spaces between entries. Not sure if spaces cause problems but best to remove any between the end of one tag and start of the next. e.g. Search and replace &amp;gt; &amp;lt; with &amp;gt;&amp;lt; via a text editor.&lt;br /&gt;
* In most cases the import is halted if any of these errors occur.&lt;br /&gt;
* Duplicates in the entries which clash with entries already when merging a glossary is usually not a problem.&lt;br /&gt;
* Warnings like &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Warning: exec() has been disabled for security reasons in /moodle/lib/uploadlib.php on line 603&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; may not be the problem when importing but may distract one from dealing with problems with the format of the XML file.&lt;br /&gt;
* HTML and XHTML tags written within CONCEPT or DEFINITION elements will fail on import, showing &amp;quot;Array&amp;quot; instead of the desired content. To remedy this, try writing the (X)HTML tags within &amp;lt;![CDATA[ ]]&amp;gt; markup.&lt;br /&gt;
* If the glossary entries contain images, image paths will need amending in order for the images to be displayed when the file is imported. A search and replace in the XML file before importing is one option, another is to use the [[Search and replace]] feature within Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Restoring a course backup==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An alternative method of importing glossary entries is to restore a Moodle course backup file containing a glossary. This method includes categories, images and attachments within glossary entries and if you also select users then the authors of entries are also imported if they were originally included in the backup.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Importing tools ==&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.irpens.co.uk/moodle/MoodleExcelToGlossary.xls David Fountain&#039;s Excel macro] An Excel workbook with macros to create an XML file.&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=91224&amp;amp;parent=489666 Yasu Imao&#039;s Moodle glossaryXMLconverter_html 4] A JavaScript based converter, works directly in your browser.&lt;br /&gt;
:(Both above methods are detailed [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=79120#p536148 in this discussion].)&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.site5.com online Moodle converter ] Allows to easily create glossary online. Supports different formats of entries - Excel, concept: definition, concept - definition and others. Also can re-convert  from XML to text.  &lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=123277 Importing into Moodle] contains an explanation of how to manually create an XML file from an Excel spreadsheet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Importing glossaries in WebCT format ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See this [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=10570 Using Moodle forum discussion]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/glossary/view.php?id=851 Glossary of common terms] with entries download link for importing to other Moodle sites&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Import and export FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[XML FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=142346 Backup a glossary] forum discussion&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[cs:Import slovníkových položek]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Glossareinträge_importieren]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Importer/exporter un glossaire]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tjuly</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Import_glossary_entries&amp;diff=80076</id>
		<title>Import glossary entries</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Import_glossary_entries&amp;diff=80076"/>
		<updated>2011-01-05T08:47:41Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tjuly: /* Importing from Excel */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Glossaries}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Importing entries==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To import glossary entries via an XML file:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Follow the &amp;quot;Import entries&amp;quot; link at the top right of the main glossary page.&lt;br /&gt;
#Browse for the exported entries XML file on your computer.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the destination for the new entries, either the current glossary or a new one.&lt;br /&gt;
#If you want to import category information, click the checkbox.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the &amp;quot;Save changes&amp;quot; button. You&#039;ll then see a report of the entries and categories added to the glossary. If you enabled duplicate entries when you created the glossary, the import process will add all of the new definitions. Otherwise, it will not allow you to import any duplicate entries.&lt;br /&gt;
#see below about different tools and programs to create XML file from your glossary&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Troubleshooting ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Possible causes of problems importing entries:&lt;br /&gt;
* If there are mistakes in the XML file such as the &amp;lt;entries&amp;gt; tag being missing or the &amp;lt;info&amp;gt; tag being in the wrong place. May happen if you have constructed the XML file manually or with some sort of tool like mailmerge in Word and your template is wrong.&lt;br /&gt;
* If there are top bit set characters in the text of the entities like concepts, definitions or keywords. Replace things like &amp;amp; with &amp;amp;amp;amp;&lt;br /&gt;
* If there are tabs or spaces between entries. Not sure if spaces cause problems but best to remove any between the end of one tag and start of the next. e.g. Search and replace &amp;gt; &amp;lt; with &amp;gt;&amp;lt; via a text editor.&lt;br /&gt;
* In most cases the import is halted if any of these errors occur.&lt;br /&gt;
* Duplicates in the entries which clash with entries already when merging a glossary is usually not a problem.&lt;br /&gt;
* Warnings like &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Warning: exec() has been disabled for security reasons in /moodle/lib/uploadlib.php on line 603&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; may not be the problem when importing but may distract one from dealing with problems with the format of the XML file.&lt;br /&gt;
* HTML and XHTML tags written within CONCEPT or DEFINITION elements will fail on import, showing &amp;quot;Array&amp;quot; instead of the desired content. To remedy this, try writing the (X)HTML tags within &amp;lt;![CDATA[ ]]&amp;gt; markup.&lt;br /&gt;
* If the glossary entries contain images, image paths will need amending in order for the images to be displayed when the file is imported. A search and replace in the XML file before importing is one option, another is to use the [[Search and replace]] feature within Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Restoring a course backup==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An alternative method of importing glossary entries is to restore a Moodle course backup file containing a glossary. This method includes categories, images and attachments within glossary entries and if you also select users then the authors of entries are also imported if they were originally included in the backup.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Importing tools ==&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.irpens.co.uk/moodle/MoodleExcelToGlossary.xls David Fountain&#039;s Excel macro] An Excel workbook with macros to create an XML file.&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=91224&amp;amp;parent=489666 Yasu Imao&#039;s Moodle glossaryXMLconverter_html 4] A JavaScript based converter, works directly in your browser.&lt;br /&gt;
:(Both above methods are detailed [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=79120#p536148 in this discussion].)&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.site5.com/glossary online Moodle converter ] Allows to easily create glossary online. Supports different formats of entries - Excel, concept: definition, concept - definition and others. Also has re-verse version - from XML to text.  &lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=123277 Importing into Moodle] contains an explanation of how to manually create an XML file from an Excel spreadsheet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Importing glossaries in WebCT format ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See this [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=10570 Using Moodle forum discussion]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/glossary/view.php?id=851 Glossary of common terms] with entries download link for importing to other Moodle sites&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Import and export FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[XML FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=142346 Backup a glossary] forum discussion&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[cs:Import slovníkových položek]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Glossareinträge_importieren]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Importer/exporter un glossaire]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tjuly</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Import_glossary_entries&amp;diff=80075</id>
		<title>Import glossary entries</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Import_glossary_entries&amp;diff=80075"/>
		<updated>2011-01-05T08:37:25Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tjuly: /* Importing entries */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Glossaries}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Importing entries==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To import glossary entries via an XML file:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Follow the &amp;quot;Import entries&amp;quot; link at the top right of the main glossary page.&lt;br /&gt;
#Browse for the exported entries XML file on your computer.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the destination for the new entries, either the current glossary or a new one.&lt;br /&gt;
#If you want to import category information, click the checkbox.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the &amp;quot;Save changes&amp;quot; button. You&#039;ll then see a report of the entries and categories added to the glossary. If you enabled duplicate entries when you created the glossary, the import process will add all of the new definitions. Otherwise, it will not allow you to import any duplicate entries.&lt;br /&gt;
#see below about different tools and programs to create XML file from your glossary&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Troubleshooting ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Possible causes of problems importing entries:&lt;br /&gt;
* If there are mistakes in the XML file such as the &amp;lt;entries&amp;gt; tag being missing or the &amp;lt;info&amp;gt; tag being in the wrong place. May happen if you have constructed the XML file manually or with some sort of tool like mailmerge in Word and your template is wrong.&lt;br /&gt;
* If there are top bit set characters in the text of the entities like concepts, definitions or keywords. Replace things like &amp;amp; with &amp;amp;amp;amp;&lt;br /&gt;
* If there are tabs or spaces between entries. Not sure if spaces cause problems but best to remove any between the end of one tag and start of the next. e.g. Search and replace &amp;gt; &amp;lt; with &amp;gt;&amp;lt; via a text editor.&lt;br /&gt;
* In most cases the import is halted if any of these errors occur.&lt;br /&gt;
* Duplicates in the entries which clash with entries already when merging a glossary is usually not a problem.&lt;br /&gt;
* Warnings like &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Warning: exec() has been disabled for security reasons in /moodle/lib/uploadlib.php on line 603&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; may not be the problem when importing but may distract one from dealing with problems with the format of the XML file.&lt;br /&gt;
* HTML and XHTML tags written within CONCEPT or DEFINITION elements will fail on import, showing &amp;quot;Array&amp;quot; instead of the desired content. To remedy this, try writing the (X)HTML tags within &amp;lt;![CDATA[ ]]&amp;gt; markup.&lt;br /&gt;
* If the glossary entries contain images, image paths will need amending in order for the images to be displayed when the file is imported. A search and replace in the XML file before importing is one option, another is to use the [[Search and replace]] feature within Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Restoring a course backup==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An alternative method of importing glossary entries is to restore a Moodle course backup file containing a glossary. This method includes categories, images and attachments within glossary entries and if you also select users then the authors of entries are also imported if they were originally included in the backup.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Importing from Excel ==&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.irpens.co.uk/moodle/MoodleExcelToGlossary.xls David Fountain&#039;s Excel macro] An Excel workbook with macros to create an XML file.&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=91224&amp;amp;parent=489666 Yasu Imao&#039;s Moodle glossaryXMLconverter_html 4] A JavaScript based converter, works directly in your browser.&lt;br /&gt;
:(Both above methods are detailed [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=79120#p536148 in this discussion].)&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.site5.com/glossary online Moodle converter ] Allows to easily create glossary online. Supports different formats of entries - Excel, concept: definition, concept - definition and others. Also has re-verse version - from XML to text.  &lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=123277 Importing into Moodle] contains an explanation of how to manually create an XML file from an Excel spreadsheet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Importing glossaries in WebCT format ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See this [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=10570 Using Moodle forum discussion]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/glossary/view.php?id=851 Glossary of common terms] with entries download link for importing to other Moodle sites&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Import and export FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[XML FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=142346 Backup a glossary] forum discussion&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[cs:Import slovníkových položek]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Glossareinträge_importieren]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Importer/exporter un glossaire]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tjuly</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Import_glossary_entries&amp;diff=80074</id>
		<title>Import glossary entries</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Import_glossary_entries&amp;diff=80074"/>
		<updated>2011-01-05T08:30:40Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tjuly: /* Importing from Excel */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Glossaries}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Importing entries==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To import glossary entries via an XML file:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Follow the &amp;quot;Import entries&amp;quot; link at the top right of the main glossary page.&lt;br /&gt;
#Browse for the exported entries XML file on your computer.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the destination for the new entries, either the current glossary or a new one.&lt;br /&gt;
#If you want to import category information, click the checkbox.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the &amp;quot;Save changes&amp;quot; button. You&#039;ll then see a report of the entries and categories added to the glossary. If you enabled duplicate entries when you created the glossary, the import process will add all of the new definitions. Otherwise, it will not allow you to import any duplicate entries.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Troubleshooting ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Possible causes of problems importing entries:&lt;br /&gt;
* If there are mistakes in the XML file such as the &amp;lt;entries&amp;gt; tag being missing or the &amp;lt;info&amp;gt; tag being in the wrong place. May happen if you have constructed the XML file manually or with some sort of tool like mailmerge in Word and your template is wrong.&lt;br /&gt;
* If there are top bit set characters in the text of the entities like concepts, definitions or keywords. Replace things like &amp;amp; with &amp;amp;amp;amp;&lt;br /&gt;
* If there are tabs or spaces between entries. Not sure if spaces cause problems but best to remove any between the end of one tag and start of the next. e.g. Search and replace &amp;gt; &amp;lt; with &amp;gt;&amp;lt; via a text editor.&lt;br /&gt;
* In most cases the import is halted if any of these errors occur.&lt;br /&gt;
* Duplicates in the entries which clash with entries already when merging a glossary is usually not a problem.&lt;br /&gt;
* Warnings like &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Warning: exec() has been disabled for security reasons in /moodle/lib/uploadlib.php on line 603&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; may not be the problem when importing but may distract one from dealing with problems with the format of the XML file.&lt;br /&gt;
* HTML and XHTML tags written within CONCEPT or DEFINITION elements will fail on import, showing &amp;quot;Array&amp;quot; instead of the desired content. To remedy this, try writing the (X)HTML tags within &amp;lt;![CDATA[ ]]&amp;gt; markup.&lt;br /&gt;
* If the glossary entries contain images, image paths will need amending in order for the images to be displayed when the file is imported. A search and replace in the XML file before importing is one option, another is to use the [[Search and replace]] feature within Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Restoring a course backup==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An alternative method of importing glossary entries is to restore a Moodle course backup file containing a glossary. This method includes categories, images and attachments within glossary entries and if you also select users then the authors of entries are also imported if they were originally included in the backup.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Importing from Excel ==&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.irpens.co.uk/moodle/MoodleExcelToGlossary.xls David Fountain&#039;s Excel macro] An Excel workbook with macros to create an XML file.&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=91224&amp;amp;parent=489666 Yasu Imao&#039;s Moodle glossaryXMLconverter_html 4] A JavaScript based converter, works directly in your browser.&lt;br /&gt;
:(Both above methods are detailed [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=79120#p536148 in this discussion].)&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.site5.com/glossary online Moodle converter ] Allows to easily create glossary online. Supports different formats of entries - Excel, concept: definition, concept - definition and others. Also has re-verse version - from XML to text.  &lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=123277 Importing into Moodle] contains an explanation of how to manually create an XML file from an Excel spreadsheet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Importing glossaries in WebCT format ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See this [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=10570 Using Moodle forum discussion]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/glossary/view.php?id=851 Glossary of common terms] with entries download link for importing to other Moodle sites&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Import and export FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[XML FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=142346 Backup a glossary] forum discussion&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[cs:Import slovníkových položek]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Glossareinträge_importieren]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Importer/exporter un glossaire]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tjuly</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Aiken_format&amp;diff=74243</id>
		<title>Aiken format</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Aiken_format&amp;diff=74243"/>
		<updated>2010-07-27T17:39:35Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tjuly: /* Hints and Tips */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;The Aiken format is a very simple way of creating multiple choice questions using a clear human-readable format. (The GIFT format has many more options and perhaps is less prone to errors, but doesn&#039;t look as straight-forward as AIKEN. ) The question must be all on one line.  Each answer must start with a single-letter character, followed by a period &#039;.&#039; or a bracket &#039;)&#039;, then a space.  The answer line must immediately follow, starting with &amp;quot;ANSWER: &amp;quot; (NOTE space after : !) and then giving the appropriate letter. Here is an example of the format:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NOTE: The answer letters (A,B,C etc.) and the word &amp;quot;ANSWER&amp;quot; &#039;&#039;&#039;must&#039;&#039;&#039; be capitalised as shown otherwise the import will fail. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;What is the correct answer to this question?&lt;br /&gt;
A. Is it this one?&lt;br /&gt;
B. Maybe this answer?&lt;br /&gt;
C. Possibly this one?&lt;br /&gt;
D. Must be this one!&lt;br /&gt;
ANSWER: D&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Which LMS has the most quiz import formats?&lt;br /&gt;
A) Moodle&lt;br /&gt;
B) ATutor&lt;br /&gt;
C) Claroline&lt;br /&gt;
D) Blackboard&lt;br /&gt;
E) WebCT&lt;br /&gt;
F) Ilias&lt;br /&gt;
ANSWER: A&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Both these examples imported into Moodle (1.9) gave questions looking like:&lt;br /&gt;
 Which LMS has the most quiz import formats?&lt;br /&gt;
 Choose one answer.&lt;br /&gt;
   a. Blackboard 	&lt;br /&gt;
   b. WebCT 	&lt;br /&gt;
   c. ATutor 	&lt;br /&gt;
   d. Moodle 	&lt;br /&gt;
   e. Claroline 	&lt;br /&gt;
   f. Ilias  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Importing ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When importing there are many options, but these do not influence Aiken Format import:&lt;br /&gt;
   Get category from file [_] &lt;br /&gt;
   Get context from file [_]&lt;br /&gt;
   Match grades [Error if grade not listed/Nearest grade if not listed]&lt;br /&gt;
   Stop on error [Yes/No] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Hints and Tips===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Use a text editor, like PSPad, (Windows &amp;quot;notepad&amp;quot; may not save with right encoding) to write the file with questions and save as a TXT file in UTF-8 format. Use only simple &#039;  not slant ones ´ ` ! Avoid other exotic characters like … HORIZONTAL ELLIPSIS (http://www.fileformat.info/info/unicode/char/2026/index.htm, three dots as a single character).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.heroku.com Moodle XML Converter] - more extensive version of AIKEN format. Supports almost all Moodle questions types - multichoice, shortanswer, cloze, essay, order, matching, numeric, truefalse&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Import questions]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[GIFT]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Questions]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Quiz]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:AIKEN]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tjuly</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Moodle_XML_format&amp;diff=74242</id>
		<title>Moodle XML format</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Moodle_XML_format&amp;diff=74242"/>
		<updated>2010-07-27T17:37:50Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tjuly: /* Useful utilities */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;The XML Format is a Moodle-specific format for importing and exporting questions to be used with the [[Quiz module]]. The format has been developed within the Moodle Community but other software may support it to a greater or lesser degree.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==A word about validity (and CDATA)==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The XML parser assumes that the XML file is well formed and does not detect or report errors. If it is not you are very likely to get unexpected errors. If you are hand-coding the XML file it is strongly recommended that you pass it through some sort of XML verifier before importing into Moodle. A simple way to do this is to open the XML file using Firefox or Internet Explorer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note particularly that embedded HTML fragments should be within [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/CDATA CDATA sections]. CDATA example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code xml&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;questiontext format=&amp;quot;html&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
       &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;&amp;lt;![CDATA[&lt;br /&gt;
              Now I can include &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;any&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt; HTML that I&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
              wish. Without the CDATA, the &amp;lt;i&amp;gt;HTML&amp;lt;/i&amp;gt; tags would break&lt;br /&gt;
              the XML!!&lt;br /&gt;
              ]]&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/questiontext&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Overall structure of XML file==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The file is enclosed by tags as follows. It is &#039;&#039;&#039;important&#039;&#039;&#039; to make sure the xml-line is really the first line of the file. A blank first line turns your otherwise compliant file into a source of frustration. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code xml&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;?xml version=&amp;quot;1.0&amp;quot; ?&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;quiz&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 .&lt;br /&gt;
 .&lt;br /&gt;
 .&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/quiz&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within the &amp;lt;quiz&amp;gt; tags are any number of &amp;lt;question&amp;gt; tags. One of these &amp;lt;question&amp;gt; tags can be a dummy question with a &#039;&#039;category&#039;&#039; type to specify a category for the import/export. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code xml&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;question type=&amp;quot;category&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;category&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;$course$/XXXX&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/category&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/question&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Where XXXX is the new category name. If the category exists, the question(s) will be added to the existing course; otherwise a new category will be created. This only works if you have &amp;quot;Get category from file&amp;quot; checked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Multiple categories can be specified in the same file. Just add another dummy &#039;category&#039; question each time you would like to establish a new category and the questions that follow it will be placed there.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The file must be encoded in [[UTF8]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle XML import and export are balanced in functionality, so if you need to understand the format you can simply create some questions and export them to see what it looks like.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tags common to all question types==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A question is written as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code xml&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;question type=&amp;quot;multichoice|truefalse|shortanswer|matching|cloze|essay|numerical|description&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;name&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
         &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;Name of question&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;/name&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;questiontext format=&amp;quot;html&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
         &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;What is the answer to this question?&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;/questiontext&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     .&lt;br /&gt;
     .&lt;br /&gt;
     .&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/question&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Format&amp;quot; selects the [[Formatting options]] for the question text. The options are &#039;&#039;&#039;moodle_auto_format&#039;&#039;&#039; (the default), &#039;&#039;&#039;html&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;plain_text&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;markdown&#039;&#039;&#039;. The choice effects the way in which the text will be displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Further tags, which usually include at least one &amp;lt;answer&amp;gt; tag, follow in the space marked with dots as child nodes to the &amp;lt;question&amp;gt; tag. The response-related tags are listed further down on this page. Various (optional?) tags are possible. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* penalty&lt;br /&gt;
* generalfeedback&lt;br /&gt;
* defaultgrade&lt;br /&gt;
* hidden&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;image&amp;gt; tag contains the url of any included image. Nested within the &amp;lt;image&amp;gt; tag may be an &amp;lt;image_base64&amp;gt; tag which contains the actual image data encoded in base64 [http://www.php.net/manual/en/function.base64-encode.php].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;In the following question type examples the common parts of the question are not shown to improve clarity. It&#039;s a good idea to export some examples yourself to see a full example.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Multiple choice==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MC questions have one &amp;lt;answer&amp;gt; tag for each choice. Each choice can carry feedback and score weighting (by using the fraction attribute). In addition, an MC question has the following tags:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* single &#039;&#039;(values: true/false)&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* shuffleanswers &#039;&#039;(values: 1/0)&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* correctfeedback &lt;br /&gt;
* partiallycorrectfeedback &lt;br /&gt;
* incorrectfeedback&lt;br /&gt;
* answernumbering (allowed values: &#039;none&#039;, &#039;abc&#039;, &#039;ABCD&#039; or &#039;123&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;single&amp;gt; tag is used to distinguish single response (radio button) and multiple response (checkbox) variants.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code xml&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;question type=&amp;quot;multichoice&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;answer fraction=&amp;quot;100&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;The correct answer&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;feedback&amp;gt;&amp;lt;text&amp;gt;Correct!&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/feedback&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/answer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;answer fraction=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;A distractor&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;feedback&amp;gt;&amp;lt;text&amp;gt;Ooops!&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/feedback&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/answer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;answer fraction=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;Another distractor&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;feedback&amp;gt;&amp;lt;text&amp;gt;Ooops!&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/feedback&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/answer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;shuffleanswers&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/shuffleanswers&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;single&amp;gt;true&amp;lt;/single&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;answernumbering&amp;gt;abc&amp;lt;/answernumbering&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== True/false ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Two answer tags are given, one which is true, and one which is false. The fraction attribute of the answer tag identifies which option is correct (100) and which is false (0). Feedback is supported. The following example shows the format when true is the correct answer and false is wrong.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code xml&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;question type=&amp;quot;truefalse&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;answer fraction=&amp;quot;100&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;true&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;feedback&amp;gt;&amp;lt;text&amp;gt;Correct!&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/feedback&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/answer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;answer fraction=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;false&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;feedback&amp;gt;&amp;lt;text&amp;gt;Ooops!&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/feedback&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/answer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Short answer  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The short answer question type supports alternative correct responses, each with its own weighting and feedback.  The Moodle XML format uses one &amp;lt;answer&amp;gt; tag for each of the alternative correct answers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;usecase&amp;gt; tag toggles case-sensitivity with the values 1/0. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code xml&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;question type=&amp;quot;shortanswer&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;answer fraction=&amp;quot;100&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;The correct answer&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;feedback&amp;gt;&amp;lt;text&amp;gt;Correct!&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/feedback&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/answer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;question type=&amp;quot;shortanswer&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;answer fraction=&amp;quot;100&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;The correct answer&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;feedback&amp;gt;&amp;lt;text&amp;gt;Correct!&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/feedback&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/answer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;answer fraction=&amp;quot;100&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;An alternative answer&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;feedback&amp;gt;&amp;lt;text&amp;gt;Correct!&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/feedback&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/answer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Numerical response ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following is a simplified version of the Moodle XML format for numerical responses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code xml&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;question type=&amp;quot;numerical&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;answer fraction=&amp;quot;100&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;23&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;feedback&amp;gt;&amp;lt;text&amp;gt;Feedback&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/feedback&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/answer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle also supports a &amp;lt;tolerance&amp;gt; tag (how accurate must the number be?) and one or more &amp;lt;unit&amp;gt; tags. Unit tags have names and multipliers. E.g. if the main answer is in kilometres, an additional answer could be the equivalent in metres with a multiplier of 1000.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; prior to 1.7.2 the fraction was expressed as a value between 0 and 1 in a &amp;lt;fraction&amp;gt; element and the answer value was &#039;&#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039;&#039; enclosed in &amp;lt;text&amp;gt; tags. This format of the numerical question type is deprecated but will still be correctly imported if found (for now).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Matching ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pair matching responses use the &amp;lt;shuffleanswers&amp;gt; tag to determine whether the order of the items should be randomized.&lt;br /&gt;
Each pair is contained inside a &amp;lt;subquestion&amp;gt; tag. The first item of each pair is contained with a &amp;lt;text&amp;gt; tag, while the second has an &amp;lt;answer&amp;gt; tag around it as well. Feedback and score weighting is not supported by Moodle for this response type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code xml&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;question type=&amp;quot;matching&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;subquestion&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;This is the 1st item in the 1st pair.&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;answer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
         &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;This is the 2nd item in the 1st pair.&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;/answer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/subquestion&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;subquestion&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;This is the 1st item in the 2nd pair.&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;answer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
         &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;This is the 2nd item in the 2nd pair.&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;/answer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/subquestion&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;shuffleanswers&amp;gt;true&amp;lt;/shuffleanswers&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Essay ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An example of the essay type question...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code xml&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;question type=&amp;quot;essay&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;answer fraction=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/answer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;/question&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There isn&#039;t an answer and there isn&#039;t a grade in this case. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; prior to 1.7.2 the fraction was expressed as a value between 0 and 1 in a &amp;lt;fraction&amp;gt; element and the answer value was &#039;&#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039;&#039; enclosed in &amp;lt;text&amp;gt; tags. This format of the essay question type is deprecated but will still be correctly imported if found (for now).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Other question types ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Cloze ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is supported, and depends on a special format for the &amp;lt;questiontext&amp;gt; tag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Description response type===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This response type has no further tags other than those contained in the question header (such as &amp;lt;questiontext&amp;gt;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Random matching ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle has a question type which consists of taking short answer questions in the same quiz and displaying them as a pair matching exercise. However Moodle is neither able to export nor import this question type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Useful utilities==&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.heroku.com Online Moodle XML converter] Convert from existing text files glossaries and quizzes to Moodle XML format. Also can convert from Moodle XMl to text. &lt;br /&gt;
*[http://finemetronome.com/moodle/ Word Template for generating Moodle XML].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.qedoc.org/en/index.php?title=Moodle_XML_format Quedoc&#039;s Moodle XML documentation]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle Docs&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Export questions]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Import questions]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[GIFT format]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Aiken format]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[XML FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Import and export FAQ]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Questions]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:Moodle XMLフォーマット]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de: Moodle XML-Format]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tjuly</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Import_glossary_entries&amp;diff=74241</id>
		<title>Import glossary entries</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Import_glossary_entries&amp;diff=74241"/>
		<updated>2010-07-27T17:35:38Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tjuly: /* Importing from Excel */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Glossaries}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Importing entries==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To import glossary entries via an XML file:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Follow the &amp;quot;Import entries&amp;quot; link at the top right of the main glossary page.&lt;br /&gt;
#Browse for the exported entries XML file on your computer.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the destination for the new entries, either the current glossary or a new one.&lt;br /&gt;
#If you want to import category information, click the checkbox.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the &amp;quot;Save changes&amp;quot; button. You&#039;ll then see a report of the entries and categories added to the glossary. If you enabled duplicate entries when you created the glossary, the import process will add all of the new definitions. Otherwise, it will not allow you to import any duplicate entries.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Troubleshooting ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Possible causes of problems importing entries:&lt;br /&gt;
* If there are mistakes in the XML file such as the &amp;lt;entries&amp;gt; tag being missing or the &amp;lt;info&amp;gt; tag being in the wrong place. May happen if you have constructed the XML file manually or with some sort of tool like mailmerge in Word and your template is wrong.&lt;br /&gt;
* If there are top bit set characters in the text of the entities like concepts, definitions or keywords. Replace things like &amp;amp; with &amp;amp;amp;amp;&lt;br /&gt;
* If there are tabs or spaces between entries. Not sure if spaces cause problems but best to remove any between the end of one tag and start of the next. e.g. Search and replace &amp;gt; &amp;lt; with &amp;gt;&amp;lt; via a text editor.&lt;br /&gt;
* In most cases the import is halted if any of these errors occur.&lt;br /&gt;
* Duplicates in the entries which clash with entries already when merging a glossary is usually not a problem.&lt;br /&gt;
* Warnings like &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Warning: exec() has been disabled for security reasons in /moodle/lib/uploadlib.php on line 603&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; may not be the problem when importing but may distract one from dealing with problems with the format of the XML file.&lt;br /&gt;
* HTML and XHTML tags written within CONCEPT or DEFINITION elements will fail on import, showing &amp;quot;Array&amp;quot; instead of the desired content. To remedy this, try writing the (X)HTML tags within &amp;lt;![CDATA[ ]]&amp;gt; markup.&lt;br /&gt;
* If the glossary entries contain images, image paths will need amending in order for the images to be displayed when the file is imported. A search and replace in the XML file before importing is one option, another is to use the [[Search and replace]] feature within Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Restoring a course backup==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An alternative method of importing glossary entries is to restore a Moodle course backup file containing a glossary. This method includes categories, images and attachments within glossary entries and if you also select users then the authors of entries are also imported if they were originally included in the backup.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Importing from Excel ==&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.irpens.co.uk/moodle/MoodleExcelToGlossary.xls David Fountain&#039;s Excel macro] An Excel workbook with macros to create an XML file.&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=91224&amp;amp;parent=489666 Yasu Imao&#039;s Moodle glossaryXMLconverter_html 4] A JavaScript based converter, works directly in your browser.&lt;br /&gt;
:(Both above methods are detailed [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=79120#p536148 in this discussion].)&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.heroku.com/questions/glossary Moodle XML converter ] Allows easily create glossary from existing materials. Supports different formats of entries - Excel, concept: definition, concept - definition and others. Also can convert from XML to text.  &lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=123277 Importing into Moodle] contains an explanation of how to manually create an XML file from an Excel spreadsheet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Importing glossaries in WebCT format ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See this [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=10570 Using Moodle forum discussion]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/glossary/view.php?id=851 Glossary of common terms] with entries download link for importing to other Moodle sites&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Import and export FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[XML FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=142346 Backup a glossary] forum discussion&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[cs:Import slovníkových položek]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Glossareinträge_importieren]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Importer/exporter un glossaire]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tjuly</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Import_and_export_FAQ&amp;diff=74240</id>
		<title>Import and export FAQ</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Import_and_export_FAQ&amp;diff=74240"/>
		<updated>2010-07-27T17:33:30Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tjuly: /* How do I import glossary entries? */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== How do I import users? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* See [[Upload users]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How do I import course data? ==&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
* See [[Import course data]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I import and export grades?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Grade import]] (for Moodle 1.9 onwards).&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Grade export]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How do I import glossary entries? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For details see [[Import glossary entries]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Very useful tools are:&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.heroku.com/questions/glossary Moodle XML converter] Convert your glossary online just uploading your text and get Moodle XML file to import entries. Supports all glossary options, different types of input entries - Excel, concept - definition, Concept &amp;lt;break&amp;gt; definition, and some others. Also can convert from Moodle XML to text. &lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.irpens.co.uk/moodle/MoodleExcelToGlossary.xls David Fountain&#039;s Excel macro] An Excel workbook with macros to create an XML file.&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=91224&amp;amp;parent=489666 Yasu Imao&#039;s Moodle glossaryXMLconverter_html 4] A JavaScript based converter, works directly in your browser.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How do I import and export database entries? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Database export]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Adding a database entry]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== How can I enable Excel export for students? ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the Database activity you have the ability to allow students to export all the data in the following formats: CSV, Excel and ODS (OpenDocument Spreadsheet from OpenOffice).&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:ExportTab.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With this functionality students can choose to export the data of all fields or only of selected fields. (Picture fields cannot be exported.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, this feature is not enabled by default for students. You need to override the student permissions for the Database activity and choose &#039;Allow&#039; for the permission to &#039;View presets from all users&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:EnableExportView.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will result in the &#039;Export&#039; tab being visible to students in the Database activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also see [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=133712 this thread] for a discussion on this.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I import and export questions?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* See [[Import questions]] and [[Export questions]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.heroku.com Moodle XML converter] Free online service to create quizzes and glossaries from existing files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;OpenOffice&#039;&#039;&#039; template for creating questions in [[GIFT|GIFT format]]: http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=20705&amp;amp;parent=168385&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;MS Word&#039;&#039;&#039; template for creating questions in [[GIFT|GIFT format]]: http://www.soberit.hut.fi/sprg/resources/moodle/GiftConverter.html&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Excel&#039;&#039;&#039; to [[GIFT|GIFT format]] export tool: http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=66660&lt;br /&gt;
* The complete list: [[GIFT#Word_processors_and_Spreadsheets_tools_that_create_GIFTs|Word processors and Spreadsheets tools that create GIFTs]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Importing &amp;quot;GIFT&amp;quot; format files: https://www.acquin.org/moodle/help.php?file=formatgift.html&amp;amp;module=quiz&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://software.cristianoleoni.com/freebies/glossaryconv.php ATutor to Moodle converter] - see http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=115338.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/user.php?id=726938&amp;amp;course=5 Eoin Campbell is working on a XSLT based import/export module for Word] - stay tuned! &lt;br /&gt;
: See also his [http://www.moodle2word.net website for converting Moodle Questions into tables in a Microsoft Word file, and vice versa].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Which formats are used for importing questions?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to create questions outside of Moodle these two text based formats might be the most important:&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
*[[GIFT]] - Moodle &#039;proprietary&#039; text format for import and export. Reasonably comprehensive.&lt;br /&gt;
: See [[GIFT format]].&lt;br /&gt;
: Here is a 2-column GIFT format reference sheet: [http://buypct.com/gift_reference.pdf GIFT Reference Sheet]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Moodle XML]] - Moodle &#039;proprietary&#039; xml format for import and export. Very comprehensive. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You find the complete list of supported formats under [[Import questions]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Which file formats can I use? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== What encodings should I use? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The recommended standard encoding for all Moodle files is [[UTF-8]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* See [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=62251 Importing Entries Using a Text File] for an example where a UTF-8 file with [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Byte-order_mark BOM] caused Database Activity entries not being imported. See also MDL-9075 (&amp;quot;User Upload Failure when file contains UTF-8 BOM&amp;quot;).&lt;br /&gt;
: Some of this information is collected at [[UTF-8 and BOM]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See also: &lt;br /&gt;
* [http://morgretdesigns.wordpress.com/2008/03/07/changing-file-encoding-on-a-csv-with-openoffice-calc/ Changing File Encoding on a CSV with OpenOffice Calc]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.internet-business-solutions.gr/lang-en/e-commerce/44-strategies/65-utf-8-csv UTF-8 CSV]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:Category:UTF-8]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Search Moodle Forums [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/search.php?search=subject%3Aimport+&amp;amp;id=5 subject:import].&lt;br /&gt;
* Search Moodle Forums [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/search.php?search=subject%3Aexport+&amp;amp;id=5 subject:export].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[XML FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[IMS Common Cartridge import]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* There&#039;s an interesting project on [http://groups.drupal.org/node/21559 integrating Drupal and Moodle quizzes] in the Drupal in Education User Group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Import und Export FAQ]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tjuly</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=XML_FAQ&amp;diff=74239</id>
		<title>XML FAQ</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=XML_FAQ&amp;diff=74239"/>
		<updated>2010-07-27T17:28:59Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tjuly: /* Are there tools for converting to and from Moodle XML? */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;(If you don&#039;t find the answer to your question here, just post the question. There might be someone out there to provide the answer.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==XML in general==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Where do I find general information about XML?===&lt;br /&gt;
* http://www.w3schools.com/xml/default.asp - A host of information and hands-on examples&lt;br /&gt;
*http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/XML - A good starting point&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Moodle XML==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Is there only one kind of Moodle XML?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No, there are (at least) two different kinds of Moodle XML, one for importing/exporting glossaries and one for questions (quizzes), the latter being the one usually referred to as &amp;quot;Moodle XML&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then there is XML in the SCORM/IMS packages that Moodle can import and must be able to handle. These packages are educational content that has been marked up in a special way to be able to be used in compatible Learning Management Systems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The course backup and restore process also generates an XML file (inside the zip file) that contains all the information about the course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Where do I find documentation about Moodle XML?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The official documentation: [[Moodle XML]]&lt;br /&gt;
* A more thorough documentation: [http://www.qedoc.org/en/index.php?title=Moodle_XML_format Moodle XML format] by Quedoc&lt;br /&gt;
: [http://www.qedoc.org/en/index.php?title=Problems_when_transferring_XML_format_into_Moodle Problems when transferring XML format into Moodle]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tools==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Are there tools for converting to and from Moodle XML?===&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.heroku.com Moodle XML Converter] - allows to create XML from text files. Also can converse Moodle XML into text file. Supports quiz and glossary.&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=91224#p489764 Glossary to XML Converter]&lt;br /&gt;
:A simple HTML file which converts TSV data to XML using JavaScript&lt;br /&gt;
* Microsoft Office macros: http://finemetronome.com/moodle/&lt;br /&gt;
* OpenOffice XML filters (TBA see [https://docs.moodle.org/en/User:Frank_Ralf/Moodle_XML1#OpenOffice_.26_XML] for some pointers)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How can I view and edit XML files?===&lt;br /&gt;
XML is just text so you can view and edit it with any text editor. However, this isn&#039;t very easy for anything more than a trivial file. There are a number of dedicated XML editors available for many platforms. If you only need to view the XML, most browsers are able to render XML files. Some even let you view the source text and do some basic editing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Import and export FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:XML FAQ]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tjuly</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=XML_FAQ&amp;diff=74238</id>
		<title>XML FAQ</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=XML_FAQ&amp;diff=74238"/>
		<updated>2010-07-27T17:27:32Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tjuly: /* Are there tools for converting to and from Moodle XML? */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;(If you don&#039;t find the answer to your question here, just post the question. There might be someone out there to provide the answer.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==XML in general==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Where do I find general information about XML?===&lt;br /&gt;
* http://www.w3schools.com/xml/default.asp - A host of information and hands-on examples&lt;br /&gt;
*http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/XML - A good starting point&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Moodle XML==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Is there only one kind of Moodle XML?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No, there are (at least) two different kinds of Moodle XML, one for importing/exporting glossaries and one for questions (quizzes), the latter being the one usually referred to as &amp;quot;Moodle XML&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then there is XML in the SCORM/IMS packages that Moodle can import and must be able to handle. These packages are educational content that has been marked up in a special way to be able to be used in compatible Learning Management Systems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The course backup and restore process also generates an XML file (inside the zip file) that contains all the information about the course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Where do I find documentation about Moodle XML?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The official documentation: [[Moodle XML]]&lt;br /&gt;
* A more thorough documentation: [http://www.qedoc.org/en/index.php?title=Moodle_XML_format Moodle XML format] by Quedoc&lt;br /&gt;
: [http://www.qedoc.org/en/index.php?title=Problems_when_transferring_XML_format_into_Moodle Problems when transferring XML format into Moodle]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tools==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Are there tools for converting to and from Moodle XML?===&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.heroku.com Moodle XML Converter] - allows to create XML from text files. Also can converse Moodle XML into text file. &lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=91224#p489764 Glossary to XML Converter]&lt;br /&gt;
:A simple HTML file which converts TSV data to XML using JavaScript&lt;br /&gt;
* Microsoft Office macros: http://finemetronome.com/moodle/&lt;br /&gt;
* OpenOffice XML filters (TBA see [https://docs.moodle.org/en/User:Frank_Ralf/Moodle_XML1#OpenOffice_.26_XML] for some pointers)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How can I view and edit XML files?===&lt;br /&gt;
XML is just text so you can view and edit it with any text editor. However, this isn&#039;t very easy for anything more than a trivial file. There are a number of dedicated XML editors available for many platforms. If you only need to view the XML, most browsers are able to render XML files. Some even let you view the source text and do some basic editing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Import and export FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:XML FAQ]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tjuly</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=XML_FAQ&amp;diff=74237</id>
		<title>XML FAQ</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=XML_FAQ&amp;diff=74237"/>
		<updated>2010-07-27T17:27:12Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tjuly: /* Are there tools for converting to and from Moodle XML? */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;(If you don&#039;t find the answer to your question here, just post the question. There might be someone out there to provide the answer.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==XML in general==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Where do I find general information about XML?===&lt;br /&gt;
* http://www.w3schools.com/xml/default.asp - A host of information and hands-on examples&lt;br /&gt;
*http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/XML - A good starting point&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Moodle XML==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Is there only one kind of Moodle XML?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No, there are (at least) two different kinds of Moodle XML, one for importing/exporting glossaries and one for questions (quizzes), the latter being the one usually referred to as &amp;quot;Moodle XML&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then there is XML in the SCORM/IMS packages that Moodle can import and must be able to handle. These packages are educational content that has been marked up in a special way to be able to be used in compatible Learning Management Systems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The course backup and restore process also generates an XML file (inside the zip file) that contains all the information about the course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Where do I find documentation about Moodle XML?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The official documentation: [[Moodle XML]]&lt;br /&gt;
* A more thorough documentation: [http://www.qedoc.org/en/index.php?title=Moodle_XML_format Moodle XML format] by Quedoc&lt;br /&gt;
: [http://www.qedoc.org/en/index.php?title=Problems_when_transferring_XML_format_into_Moodle Problems when transferring XML format into Moodle]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tools==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Are there tools for converting to and from Moodle XML?===&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.heroku.com Moodle XML Converter] - allows to create XML from text files. Also converse Moodle XML into text file. &lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=91224#p489764 Glossary to XML Converter]&lt;br /&gt;
:A simple HTML file which converts TSV data to XML using JavaScript&lt;br /&gt;
* Microsoft Office macros: http://finemetronome.com/moodle/&lt;br /&gt;
* OpenOffice XML filters (TBA see [https://docs.moodle.org/en/User:Frank_Ralf/Moodle_XML1#OpenOffice_.26_XML] for some pointers)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How can I view and edit XML files?===&lt;br /&gt;
XML is just text so you can view and edit it with any text editor. However, this isn&#039;t very easy for anything more than a trivial file. There are a number of dedicated XML editors available for many platforms. If you only need to view the XML, most browsers are able to render XML files. Some even let you view the source text and do some basic editing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Import and export FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:XML FAQ]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tjuly</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=GIFT_format&amp;diff=74236</id>
		<title>GIFT format</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=GIFT_format&amp;diff=74236"/>
		<updated>2010-07-27T17:25:39Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tjuly: /* External links */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;GIFT format allows someone to use a text editor to write multiple-choice, true-false, short answer, matching missing word and numerical questions in a simple format that can be imported. The GIFT format is also an export file format available in Question bank. The format has been developed within the Moodle Community but other software may support it to a greater or lesser degree.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*When creating a large numbers of questions, GIFT can provide a quick way of bulk loading questions either into a [[Question bank|question category]], or into a [[Adding_a_question_page#Importing_questions|Lesson]]. &lt;br /&gt;
*Sometimes it is easier proofing questions in a question category by viewing them in a GIFT file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== General instructions ==&lt;br /&gt;
At least one blank line must be left between each question. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the simple form, the question comes first, then the answers are set in between brackets, with an equal sign indicating the correct answer(s) and tilde the wrong answers.  A Number sign will insert a response.  Questions can be weighted by placing percentage signs around the weight.  Comments are preceded by double slashes and are not imported.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here are some useful [http://moodle.org/file.php/5/moddata/forum/121/236161/GIFT-examples.zip GIFT examples] than can be imported or used as rough template.  Many of the examples below used the questions in the file as a starting point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== UTF-8 encoding ===&lt;br /&gt;
Any GIFT file &#039;&#039;&#039;must&#039;&#039;&#039; be correctly encoded in [[UTF8]]. You can use Microsoft&#039;s text editor Notepad which comes with Windows to save your file in UTF-8. &#039;&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039;&#039;: ANSI format will (only) work for languages without any special characters (like ä, ö, ü, æ, å, ø, œ or ß). And don&#039;t use &amp;quot;Unicode&amp;quot; as format as this is actually UTF-16 and won&#039;t work. See [[Converting files to UTF-8]] for further information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Format symbols===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here are some common GIFT symbols and their use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
! Symbols !! Use&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| // text || Comment until end of line (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ::title:: || Question title (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| text || Question text (becomes title if no title specified)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| { || Start answer(s) -- without any answers, text is a description of following questions&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| {T} or {F} || True or False answer; also {TRUE} and {FALSE}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| { ... =right ... } || Correct answer for multiple choice, (multiple answer? -- see page comments) or fill-in-the-blank&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| { ... ~wrong ... } || Incorrect answer for multiple choice or multiple answer&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| { ... =item -&amp;gt; match ... } || Answer for matching questions&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| #feedback text || Answer feedback for preceding multiple, fill-in-the-blank, or numeric answers&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| {# || Start numeric answer(s)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| answer:tolerance || Numeric answer accepted within ± tolerance range&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| low..high || Lower and upper range values of accepted numeric answer &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| =%n%answer:tolerance || n percent credit for one of multiple numeric ranges within tolerance from answer&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| } || End answer(s)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| \character || Backslash escapes the special meaning of ~, =, #, {, }, and :&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| \n || Places a newline in question text -- blank lines delimit questions&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here are some quick examples:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // true/false&lt;br /&gt;
 ::Q1:: 1+1=2 {T}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 // multiple choice with specified feedback for right and wrong answers&lt;br /&gt;
 ::Q2:: What&#039;s between orange and green in the spectrum? &lt;br /&gt;
 { =yellow # right; good! ~red # wrong, it&#039;s yellow ~blue # wrong, it&#039;s yellow }&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 // fill-in-the-blank&lt;br /&gt;
 ::Q3:: Two plus {=two =2} equals four.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 // matching&lt;br /&gt;
 ::Q4:: Which animal eats which food? { =cat -&amp;gt; cat food =dog -&amp;gt; dog food }&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 // math range question&lt;br /&gt;
 ::Q5:: What is a number from 1 to 5? {#3:2}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 // math range specified with interval end points&lt;br /&gt;
 ::Q6:: What is a number from 1 to 5? {#1..5}&lt;br /&gt;
 // translated on import to the same as Q5, but unavailable from Moodle question interface&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 // multiple numeric answers with partial credit and feedback&lt;br /&gt;
 ::Q7:: When was Ulysses S. Grant born? {#&lt;br /&gt;
          =1822:0      # Correct! Full credit.&lt;br /&gt;
          =%50%1822:2  # He was born in 1822. Half credit for being close.&lt;br /&gt;
 }&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 // essay&lt;br /&gt;
 ::Q8:: How are you? {}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Format symbols explained===&lt;br /&gt;
The multiple choice format below as a comment line // for the question, when Moodle exports it the question unique id number will appear here.  The first set of  :: precedes the question title. The second :: precedes the actual question. The first { indicates the start of the answers.  The correct answer is preceded by an = sign and wrong answers by a ~.  Teacher responses have a # in front of them.  The question ends with a } and then a blank line. NOTE it is { } not ( ) parenthesis! Usually these are gotten with help of the [AltGr] key.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 //Comment line &lt;br /&gt;
 ::Question title &lt;br /&gt;
 :: Question {&lt;br /&gt;
 =A correct answer&lt;br /&gt;
 ~Wrong answer1&lt;br /&gt;
 #A response to wrong answer1&lt;br /&gt;
 ~Wrong answer2&lt;br /&gt;
 #A response to wrong answer2&lt;br /&gt;
 ~Wrong answer3&lt;br /&gt;
 #A response to wrong answer3&lt;br /&gt;
 ~Wrong answer4&lt;br /&gt;
 #A response to wrong answer4&lt;br /&gt;
 }&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The shortest format for a multiple choice question is:&lt;br /&gt;
 Question{= A Correct Answer ~Wrong answer1 ~Wrong answer2 ~Wrong answer3 ~Wrong answer4 }&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;Tip:&#039;&#039; If you don&#039;t specify a question title the WHOLE question will be used as the title at the time of import into Moodle. There are pros and cons to allowing this to happen. Cons: This can add a lot of unnecessary words. This can include characters which might confuse the export GIFT process.  Pros: On the other hand. if the start of each question is different, it can make finding a single question easier in a category list of questions. It will save you typing.  Having the same title for every question is a very bad idea.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Question format examples==&lt;br /&gt;
There are several ways to use a text editor to write a GIFT format.  We will try to show the simple version for example and in some formats we will introduce some more complex features that can be imported into many Moodle Question formats.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Multiple choice===&lt;br /&gt;
For multiple choice questions, wrong answers are prefixed with a tilde (~) and the correct answer is prefixed with an equal sign (=).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is a simple acceptable GIFT multiple choice format:&lt;br /&gt;
 Who&#039;s buried in Grant&#039;s tomb?{=Grant ~no one ~Napoleon ~Churchill ~Mother Teresa }&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is a longer format that uses most of the GIFT elements:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  // question: 1 name: Grants tomb&lt;br /&gt;
 ::Grants tomb::Who is buried in Grant&#039;s tomb in New York City? {&lt;br /&gt;
 =Grant&lt;br /&gt;
 ~No one&lt;br /&gt;
 #Was true for 12 years, but Grant&#039;s remains were buried in the tomb in 1897&lt;br /&gt;
 ~Napoleon&lt;br /&gt;
 #He was buried in France&lt;br /&gt;
 ~Churchill&lt;br /&gt;
 #He was buried in England&lt;br /&gt;
 ~Mother Teresa&lt;br /&gt;
 #She was buried in India&lt;br /&gt;
 }&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===True-false===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this question-type the answer indicates whether the statement is true or false. The answer should be written as {TRUE} or {FALSE}, or abbreviated to {T} or {F}.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // question: 0 name: TrueStatement using {T} style&lt;br /&gt;
 ::TrueStatement about Grant::Grant was buried in a tomb in New York City.{T}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 // question: 0 name: FalseStatement using {FALSE} style&lt;br /&gt;
 ::FalseStatement about sun::The sun rises in the West.{FALSE}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Short answer===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Answers in Short Answer question-type are all prefixed by an equal sign (=), indicating that they are all correct answers. The answers must not contain a tilde.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here are two examples using the simple method showing possible right answers for credit.&lt;br /&gt;
 Who&#039;s buried in Grant&#039;s tomb?{=Grant =Ulysses S. Grant =Ulysses Grant}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Two plus two equals {=four =4}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If there is only one correct Short Answer, it may be written without the equal sign prefix, as long as it cannot be confused as True-False.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Matching===&lt;br /&gt;
Matching pairs begin with an equal sign (=) and are separated by this symbol &amp;quot;-&amp;gt;&amp;quot;. There must be at least three matching pairs.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 Match the following countries with their corresponding capitals. {&lt;br /&gt;
    =Canada -&amp;gt; Ottawa&lt;br /&gt;
    =Italy  -&amp;gt; Rome&lt;br /&gt;
    =Japan  -&amp;gt; Tokyo&lt;br /&gt;
    =India  -&amp;gt; New Delhi&lt;br /&gt;
    }&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Matching questions do not support feedback or percentage answer weights.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Missing word===&lt;br /&gt;
The Missing Word format automatically inserts a fill-in-the-blank line (like this _____) in the middle of the sentence. To use the Missing Word format, place the answers where you want the line to appear in the sentence.&lt;br /&gt;
 Moodle costd{~lots of money =nothing ~a small amount} to download from moodle.org.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the answers come before the closing punctuation mark, a fill-in-the-blank line will be inserted for the &amp;quot;missing word&amp;quot; format. All question types can be written in the Missing Word format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There must be a blank line (double carriage return) separating questions. For clarity, the answers can be written on separate lines and even indented. Some examples:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Mahatma Gandhi birthday is an Indian holiday on  {&lt;br /&gt;
 ~15th&lt;br /&gt;
 ~3rd&lt;br /&gt;
 =2nd&lt;br /&gt;
 } of October.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 Since {&lt;br /&gt;
   ~495 AD&lt;br /&gt;
   =1066 AD&lt;br /&gt;
   ~1215 AD&lt;br /&gt;
   ~ 43 AD&lt;br /&gt;
 }&lt;br /&gt;
 the town of Hastings England has been &amp;quot;famous with visitors&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Numerical questions===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The answer section for Numerical questions must start with a number sign (#). Numerical answers can include an error margin, which is written following the correct answer, separated by a colon. So for example, if the correct answer is anything between 1.5 and 2.5, then it would be written as follows {#2:0.5}. This indicates that 2 with an error margin of 0.5 is correct (i.e., the span from 1.5 to 2.5). If no error margin is specified, it will be assumed to be zero.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is a simple numerical format question. It will accept a range of 5 years.&lt;br /&gt;
 When was Ulysses S. Grant born?{#1822:5}&lt;br /&gt;
It is a good idea to check the margins of the range, 3.141 is not counted as correct and 3.142 is considered in the range. &lt;br /&gt;
 What is the value of pi (to 3 decimal places)? {#3.14159:0.0005}.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Optionally, numerical answers can be written as a span in the following format {#MinimumValue..MaximumValue}.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 What is the value of pi (to 3 decimal places)? {#3.141..3.142}.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle&#039;s browser interface does not support multiple numerical answers, but Moodle&#039;s code can and so does GIFT. This can be used to specify numerical multiple spans, and can be particularly usefully when combined with percentage weight grades. If multiple answers are used, they must be separated by an equal sign, like short answer questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 When was Ulysses S. Grant born? {#&lt;br /&gt;
    =1822:0&lt;br /&gt;
    =%50%1822:2&lt;br /&gt;
 }&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that since Moodle&#039;s browser GUI doesn&#039;t support multiple answers for Numerical questions, there&#039;s no way to see them or edit them through Moodle. The only way to change a numerical answer beyond the first, is to delete the question and re-import it (or use something like phpMyAdmin).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Essay===&lt;br /&gt;
An essay question is simply a question with an empty answer field. Nothing is permitted between the curly braces at all.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Write a short biography of Dag Hammarskjöld. {}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Description===&lt;br /&gt;
A description &amp;quot;question&amp;quot; has no answer part at all&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 You can use your pencil and paper for these next math questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Options==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition to these basic question types, this filter offers the following options: line comments, question name, feedback and percentage answer weight.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Line Comments===&lt;br /&gt;
Comments that will not be imported into Moodle can be included in the text file. This can be used to provide headers or more information about questions. All lines that start with a double backslash (not counting tabs or spaces) will be ignored by the filter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Subheading: Numerical questions below&lt;br /&gt;
 What&#039;s 2 plus 2? {#4}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Comments will be exported from Moodle and will include the unique question id.  The above question after it was imported and then exported from Moodle:&lt;br /&gt;
 // question: 914  name: What&#039;s 2 plus 2? &lt;br /&gt;
 ::What&#039;s 2 plus 2?::What&#039;s 2 plus 2?{#&lt;br /&gt;
     =4:0#&lt;br /&gt;
 }&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Question Name===&lt;br /&gt;
A question name can be specified by placing it first and enclosing it within double colons.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 ::Kanji Origins::Japanese characters originally&lt;br /&gt;
 came from what country? {=China}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 ::Thanksgiving Date::The American holiday of Thanksgiving is &lt;br /&gt;
 celebrated on the {~second ~third =fourth} Thursday of November.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If no question name is specified, the entire question will be used as the name by default.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Feedback===&lt;br /&gt;
Feedback can be included for each answer by following the answer with a number sign (# also known as a hash mark) and the feedback.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 What&#039;s the answer to this multiple-choice question? {&lt;br /&gt;
   ~wrong answer#feedback comment on the wrong answer&lt;br /&gt;
   ~another wrong answer#feedback comment on this wrong answer&lt;br /&gt;
   =right answer#Very good!&lt;br /&gt;
 }&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
 //From The Hitchhiker&#039;s Guide to the Galaxy&lt;br /&gt;
 Deep Thought said &amp;quot; {&lt;br /&gt;
   =forty two#Correct according to The Hitchhiker&#039;s Guide to the Galaxy!&lt;br /&gt;
   =42#Correct, as told to Loonquawl and Phouchg&lt;br /&gt;
   =forty-two#Correct!&lt;br /&gt;
 }  is the Ultimate Answer to the Ultimate Question of Life, The Universe, and Everything.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
    42 is the Absolute Answer to everything.{&lt;br /&gt;
 FALSE#42is the Ultimate Answer.#You gave the right answer.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For Multiple Choice questions, feedback is displayed only for the answer the student selected. For short answer, feedback is shown only when students input the corresponding correct answer. For true-false questions, there can be one or two feedback strings. The first is shown if the student gives the wrong answer. The second if the student gives the right answer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Percentage Answer Weights===&lt;br /&gt;
Percentage answer weights are available for both Multiple Choice and Short Answer questions. Percentage answer weights can be included by following the tilde (for Multiple Choice) or equal sign (for Short Answer) with the desired percent enclosed within percent signs (e.g., %50%). This option can be combined with feedback comments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Difficult question.{~wrong answer ~%50%half credit answer =full credit answer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 ::Jesus&#039; hometown::Jesus Christ was from {&lt;br /&gt;
    ~Jerusalem#This was an important city, but the wrong answer.&lt;br /&gt;
    ~%25%Bethlehem#He was born here, but not raised here.&lt;br /&gt;
    ~%50%Galilee#You need to be more specific.&lt;br /&gt;
    =Nazareth#Yes! That&#039;s right!&lt;br /&gt;
 }.&lt;br /&gt;
     &lt;br /&gt;
 ::Jesus&#039; hometown:: Jesus Christ was from {&lt;br /&gt;
    =Nazareth#Yes! That&#039;s right!&lt;br /&gt;
    =%75%Nazereth#Right, but misspelled.&lt;br /&gt;
    =%25%Bethlehem#He was born here, but not raised here.&lt;br /&gt;
 }&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that the last two examples are essentially the same question, first as multiple choice and then as short answer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that it is possible to specify percentage answer weights that are NOT available through the browser interface. The Match Grades drop-down on the import page determines how these are handled. You can either request that an error be reported or that the answer weight be adjusted to the nearest valid answer weight.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specify text-formatting for the question&lt;br /&gt;
The question text (only) may have an optional text format specified. Currently the available formats are moodle (Moodle Auto-Format), html (HTML format), plain (Plain text format) and markdown (Markdown format). The format is specified in square brackets immediately before the question text. See [[Formatting text]] for further information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 [markdown]The *American holiday of Thanksgiving* is celebrated on the {&lt;br /&gt;
    ~second&lt;br /&gt;
    ~third&lt;br /&gt;
    =fourth&lt;br /&gt;
 } Thursday of November.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Multiple Answers===&lt;br /&gt;
The Multiple Answers option is used for multiple choice questions when two or more answers must be selected in order to obtain full credit. The multiple answers option is enabled by assigning partial answer weight to multiple answers, while allowing no single answer to receive full credit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 What two people are entombed in Grant&#039;s tomb? {&lt;br /&gt;
    ~No one&lt;br /&gt;
    ~%50%Grant&lt;br /&gt;
    ~%50%Grant&#039;s wife&lt;br /&gt;
    ~Grant&#039;s father&lt;br /&gt;
 }&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that there is no equal sign (=) in any answer and the answers should total no more than 100%, otherwise Moodle will return an error. To avoid the problem of students automatically getting 100% by simply checking all of the answers, it is best to include negative answer weights for wrong answers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 What two people are entombed in Grant&#039;s tomb? {&lt;br /&gt;
    ~%-50%No one&lt;br /&gt;
    ~%50%Grant&lt;br /&gt;
    ~%50%Grant&#039;s wife&lt;br /&gt;
    ~%-50%Grant&#039;s father&lt;br /&gt;
 }&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Special Characters ~ = # { }===&lt;br /&gt;
These symbols ~ = # { } : control the operation of this filter and cannot be used as normal text within questions. Since these symbols have a special role in determining the operation of this filter, they are called &amp;quot;control characters.&amp;quot; But sometimes you may want to use one of these characters, for example to show a mathematical formula in a question. The way to get around this problem is &amp;quot;escaping&amp;quot; the control characters. This means simply putting a backslash (\) before a control character so the filter will know that you want to use it as a literal character instead of as a control character. For example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Which answer equals 5? {&lt;br /&gt;
    ~ \= 2 + 2&lt;br /&gt;
    = \= 2 + 3&lt;br /&gt;
    ~ \= 2 + 4&lt;br /&gt;
 }&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 ::GIFT Control Characters::&lt;br /&gt;
 Which of the following is NOT a control character for the GIFT import format? {&lt;br /&gt;
   ~ \~     # \~ is a control character.&lt;br /&gt;
   ~ \=     # \= is a control character.&lt;br /&gt;
   ~ \#     # \# is a control character.&lt;br /&gt;
   ~ \{     # \{ is a control character.&lt;br /&gt;
   ~ \}     # \} is a control character.&lt;br /&gt;
   = \      # Correct! \ (backslash) is not a control character. BUT,&lt;br /&gt;
              it is used to escape the control characters.&lt;br /&gt;
 }&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the question is processed, the backslash is removed and is not saved in Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Specifying Categories===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to change the category into which the questions are added within the GIFT file. You can change the category as many times as you wish within the file. All questions after the modifier up to the next modifier or the end of the file will be added to the specified category. Up to the first category modifier the category specified on the import screen will be used. Note that for this to work the from file: box must be ticked on the import screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To include a category modifier include a line like this (with a blank line before and after):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 $CATEGORY: tom/dick/harry&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
or simply&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 $CATEGORY: mycategory&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
...the first example specifies a path of nested categories. In this cae the questions will go into harry. The categories are created if they do not exist.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Making questions case sensitive===&lt;br /&gt;
Short Answer questions can be made case sensitive by changing &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; to &amp;quot;1&amp;quot; in the following line:&lt;br /&gt;
 $question-&amp;gt;usecase = 0; // Ignore case&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Hints and Tips==&lt;br /&gt;
* Use the ::title:: at the beginning of every question to organize your questions when Moodle presents a list or exports them as another GIFT file.  When the title is left blank, Moodle will put the beginning of the question as the title. Some teachers want to see something like &amp;quot;001 LIT101 Poe ref Purloin Letter&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;The Purloin Letter was written by (AmLit pg 254)&amp;quot; in the title.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* You can specify markup if you need to format the question by setting [html], [moodle], [plain] or [markdown] just before the question text. See more about this in the reference pdf below.&lt;br /&gt;
* In the Lesson module, in a question page, correct answers jump by default to Next page and incorrect answers jump to This page (i.e. student has to &amp;quot;try again&amp;quot;). When importing from a GIFT format file, this is exactly the mechanism which is used.&lt;br /&gt;
* If you want a student to be taken directly from one question to the next irrespective of their answer being correct or incorrect: in the Lesson Settings, set Maximum number of attempts: to 1. &lt;br /&gt;
**Please note, however, that a message &amp;quot;correct / incorrect&amp;quot; will still be displayed to the student upon answering each question. If you do not want this (default) feedback message to be displayed then enter your own feedback message (i.e. &amp;quot;continue&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;---&amp;quot;, etc.) &lt;br /&gt;
**In case you want no visible message displayed then enter a non-breaking space as feedback. Moodle will not put it&#039;s automatic response because it sees the blank space. To do this, put a # after the answer and write [[Image:Nbsp.png]] (without spaces between these characters). &lt;br /&gt;
* Need to use a special GIFT character in your question or answer?  Put a \ in front of the GIFT character.  &lt;br /&gt;
**For example if you want to use curly braces, { or }, or equal sign, =, or # or ~ in a GIFT file (in a math question including TeX expressions) you must &amp;quot;escape&amp;quot; them by preceding them with a \ directly in front of each { or } or =. It is possible to use a replace program/macro/editor filter to do this conversion before importing to Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
* Want to change T/F type questions to multiple choice? Consider exporting the T/F questions as a GIFT file, then using a text editor to replace the (T) with (=True ~False). Perhaps change the title slightly so you will recognize the new questions.&lt;br /&gt;
* Alphabetic case-sensitive comparison is disabled by default. If you need case-sensitive comparison for short answer questions (an unusual need), precede them with:&lt;br /&gt;
   $question-&amp;gt;usecase = 1;&lt;br /&gt;
surrounded by blank lines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Word processors and Spreadsheets tools that create GIFTs==&lt;br /&gt;
Several contributors have used macros to generate GIFT files from a more familiar popular programs.   &lt;br /&gt;
* There are Word macros available for easily creating GIFT files. See [http://www.moodleschool.co.nz/mod/resource/view.php?id=83 Moodle4Teachers] for downloads and instructions for use.&lt;br /&gt;
* There are several Excel spreadsheets for generating GIFT files. Several people have built upon other contributors work.  &lt;br /&gt;
**The latest version was posted on 10 April 2007 and can be found in this thread with this file name: [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=66660 Excel2GIFTv1.1.zip by Timothy Takemoto].  There is also a set of instructions Excel2GIFTv1.1_Instructions.rtf by Jeff Shek on the same day in that thread.&lt;br /&gt;
** [http://video.google.com/videoplay?docid=-6612645502883459334# video tutorial] for using Excel2GIFTv2.xls &lt;br /&gt;
**An earlier version of this Excel spreadsheet for generating multiple choice GIFT files [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=45245 initially created by Olga Forlani and improved by A. T. Wyatt].&lt;br /&gt;
*There are Open Office templates for generating GIFT files in Writer.  These are located in the Quiz forum in the[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=20705&amp;amp;parent=168385 OOo template to write exams and convert to GIFT format thread].&lt;br /&gt;
**The most recent for OO 2.x is &amp;quot;OOo2GIFT_Template_05.zip&amp;quot; postes 17 December 2005 by Enrique Castro.&lt;br /&gt;
**An earlier version is &amp;quot;GIFT_template_OOo.zip&amp;quot; posted 22 March 2005 by Enrique Castro.&lt;br /&gt;
*There is an easy to use on line multiple question generator at [http://a4esl.org/c/qw.html  a4esl.org]. Here you write your question(s) without formating marks, select Moodle and press the generate quiz button.  This creates GIFT formatted text that can be pasted into a file for importing into Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
**The initial format requires fewer keystrokes (it uses line position and returns) than the GIFT format, so you should save time and be less likely to create invalid data.&lt;br /&gt;
** Quiz authoring template for Microsoft Word [http://moodle.org/mod/data/view.php?d=13&amp;amp;rid=578 link]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Here is a 2-column PDF [http://buypct.com/gift_reference.pdf GIFT Reference Sheet]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Export questions]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Import questions]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Import and export FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Aiken Format]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Moodle XML format]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==External links==&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://www.kingsley.k12.mi.us/documents/gift_format.pdf Formatting quizzes in GIFT format]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://en.wikiversity.org/wiki/Google_Summer_of_Code_2010_Proposal:_GIFT_Conversion Google Summer of Code 2010 Proposal: GIFT Conversion]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.heroku.com http://moodle.heroku.com ] - free online service to create quizzes very fast.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Questions]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:GIFT]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Format GIFT]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:GIFTフォーマット]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tjuly</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Import_questions&amp;diff=74232</id>
		<title>Import questions</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Import_questions&amp;diff=74232"/>
		<updated>2010-07-27T16:35:26Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tjuly: /* See also */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Questions}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle has a number of different formats that can be used to import questions into [[Question bank]] categories and as [[Adding a question page|lesson question pages]]. These include some proprietary quiz software formats, as well as text files and Moodle formats. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Importing questions from an existing file==&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to import questions from a file on your network/computer or from a file that has been saved or uploaded into your course files.  The underlying [[Import_questions#Character_encoding|character encoding]] of this file is important.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Question bank import process ===&lt;br /&gt;
The question bank allows you a great deal of flexibility when importing questions. To import questions into Moodle&#039;s [[Question bank]], use the Questions link in the course administration and select the import tab. In most versions of Moodle it is also possible to get to this screen (produced by ../question/import.php) while editing an existing quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Questions import 197.png|thumb|center|Import question formats from the import tab]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Select import tab&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the question type to import&lt;br /&gt;
*General: pick the category, determine if the context and category information that maybe contained in a GIFT or XML file should be used. &lt;br /&gt;
*Select what should happen if there are no grades or an error is detected in the import process.&lt;br /&gt;
*Determine the file to import&lt;br /&gt;
**Import from file upload.  Use the browse function to import a file from your computer. Use the &amp;quot;Upload this file&amp;quot; button to import the questions.&lt;br /&gt;
**Import from file already in course files. A popup window will take you to the course files start page. Use the &amp;quot;Import from this file&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Question bank import file gen import 1.png|thumb|center|General and import file parameters sections]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Lesson module process===&lt;br /&gt;
The question types that can be imported into a lesson are similar to question bank.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Lesson Import question types.png|thumb|center|Lesson screen asking which file type will be imported]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Lesson module|Lesson]] can only import from a file located on the teachers computer.&lt;br /&gt;
*In edit, using the expanded view&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the position where questions should be inserted into the lesson&lt;br /&gt;
*Click on the Import question link between the pages.&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the file type&lt;br /&gt;
*Use the browse function to find the file on your computer&lt;br /&gt;
*Import the selected file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Question import formats==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== [[GIFT]] === &lt;br /&gt;
Moodle &#039;proprietary&#039; text format for import and export. Reasonably comprehensive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== [[Moodle XML format|Moodle XML]] ===&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle &#039;proprietary&#039; xml format for import and export. Very comprehensive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== [[Aiken]] === &lt;br /&gt;
This format is an easy way of writing multiple-choice questions for import.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Blackboard === &lt;br /&gt;
From Moodle 1.7 onwards, if you&#039;re converting from Blackboard to Moodle, you can export your course and then import the question pools into Moodle using the Blackboard &amp;quot;POOL&amp;quot; type export format. It relies on XML functions being compiled into your PHP. Note that you must first unpack the exported zip file and provide Moodle with the appropriate .dat file. Note that this version does not work with Blackboard Version 6 and newer. (Use this format for ExamView 5 or 6)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Blackboard V6+ === &lt;br /&gt;
This module can import questions saved in Blackboard&#039;s export format. It provides limited support for Blackboard Version 6 and 7. It relies on XML functions being compiled into your PHP. You must upload the zip file exported from Blackboard. Note that this format only imports the main data file from the zip. Any other data (e.g. images) is ignored.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Course Test Manager === &lt;br /&gt;
This format enables you to import questions from the Course Test Manager from Course Technology.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== [[Embedded Answers (Cloze) question type|Embedded Answers (Cloze)]] === &lt;br /&gt;
This format is a multiple question, multiple answer question with embedded answers. They can be a bit tricky to develop, but they are a unique way of asking questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Examview === &lt;br /&gt;
ExamView 4 supported an XML export format that Moodle can import.  If you are using a newer version of ExamView, you should export using Blackboard, extract the zip archive ExamView creates, then import in Moodle using Blackboard format (do not use 6+ format for moodle import, even though exam view calls this a Blackboard6+ file--it isn&#039;t).  You can choose one of the &amp;quot;.dat&amp;quot; files from the ExamView archive to import.  Note that images are not currently imported.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any questions that included images must be edited to &amp;quot;re-link&amp;quot; those images.  The image files can be found in the file folder that is in your item test bank directory of your course files. Click the edit tool next to a question in the question list.  If one or more images files are included in the question, you should see a placeholder with the image file name in it embedded with text in the text edit window.  Click on the placeholder and then click on the insert image tool of the text editor.  Navigate to the folder containing the image files. (It will be in the folder you uploaded the zipped question bank to).  Find the file with the same name as indicated in the image placeholder.  Type the alternate text then click &amp;quot;okay&amp;quot; to re-link the image.  Click on &amp;quot;okay&amp;quot; to return to the question list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===[[Hot Potatoes]]===&lt;br /&gt;
A freeware program that can export questions into Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Learnwise===&lt;br /&gt;
This format can import multiple choice questions saved in Learnwise&#039;s XML format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===[[Missing word question format|Missing word]]===&lt;br /&gt;
This format is only used for  multiple choice questions and short answer questions, similar to GIFT.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== [[WebCT format]] === &lt;br /&gt;
This format supports importing multiple choice and short answers questions from WebCT&#039;s text format. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Caution:&#039;&#039;&#039; Keep in mind that WebCT allows more than one &amp;quot;blank&amp;quot; per short answer question; whereas, Moodle will only accommodate one blank per question. Questions that used multiple short answers in a question will not convert successfully.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Importing from other programs==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Diploma 6 ===&lt;br /&gt;
Diploma 6 also supports an XML export format that Moodle can import. If you are using a newer version of Diploma, here are the steps to  to export from Diploma and import to Moodle.  The steps are the same as those for Examview (see above).&lt;br /&gt;
*Export with the Blackboard LS 6.0 – 6.2 format. &lt;br /&gt;
*Upload the zip file to your course files and unzip the file.  Do not use the unzip feature in the quiz module – it won’t work. This will create a .dat file and a folder of images (if any of your questions included images).  &lt;br /&gt;
*Import the .dat file using the plain Blackboard (not the Blackboard 6.0 – 6.2) format.  The images are not imported at the same time, but they are available in that other folder that was in the zip file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As with Examview, any questions that include images must be edited to reestablish the links to those images. &lt;br /&gt;
*First, click the edit tool next to a question in the question list.  If there are any images in the question, you will see a placeholder with the image file name in it.  &lt;br /&gt;
*Click on the placeholder, and then the insert image tool of the text editor.  &lt;br /&gt;
*Navigate to the folder containing the image.  &lt;br /&gt;
*Find the file with the same name as the one in the placeholder, and select it.  Type the alternate text, and then click “OK” to relink the image, and then “OK” again to return to the question list.&lt;br /&gt;
See also: [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=102072] and [http://www.screencast.com/t/zydIQ55f&lt;br /&gt;
]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Old formats===&lt;br /&gt;
*AON -This format is the same as the missing word format, except it creates matching questions from the multiple choice questions. Please note that from Moodle 1.8 it will no longer be part of the standard Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Character encoding ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is important that the imported file is encoded in the [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/UTF-8 UTF-8] standard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this is not adhered to you may get import errors and/or strange characters in the imported materials. If the file is not UTF-8, an external tool must be used to change the encoding. Note that if only basic &#039;latin&#039; characters are used, then the coding issue can generally be ignored. Be particularly careful when creating questions using Microsoft Word. For reasons best known to themselves, Microsoft used their own encoding for some characters (incompatible with UTF-8) and this is likely to break the import.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;If you are having problems with the first question (or category modifier) in the file being misinterpreted (this particularly applies to GIFT format) it might be your editor adding a &amp;quot;Byte-Order-Mark&amp;quot; character at the beginning of the file. This is particularly common in Windows programs (e.g. Notepad) and is another good reason to steer clear of Microsoft products for text editing (as apposed to word processing). There are plenty of free or low cost text editors available for download. The BOM is neither recommended or required as UTF8 does not have [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Byte-order_mark byte order issues].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Match grades==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Imported grades must match one of the fixed list of valid grades, as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 100, 90, 80, 75, 70, 66.666, 60, 50, 40, 33.333, 30, 25, 20, 16.666, 14.2857, 12.5, 11.111, 10, 5, 0&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
negative values of the above list are also permitted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two settings for this switch. They affect how the import routine treats values that do not exactly match one of the values in the above list&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Error if grade not listed - If a question contains any grades not found in the list an error is displayed and that question will not be imported.&lt;br /&gt;
* Nearest grade if not listed - If a grade is found that does not match a value in the list, the grade is changed to the closest matching value in the list&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: some custom import formats write directly to the database and may bypass this check.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tips and tricks==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;TIP:&#039;&#039; It may be easier and faster to type many questions into a &#039;&#039;&#039;single text file&#039;&#039;&#039;, than to create a series of Quiz or Lesson question pages.  Some teachers report that once they master creating questions in one of the formats to import, they do not have to wait for their Moodle site screen to refresh and the process of selecting the next question type to create.   &lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;TIP:&#039;&#039; Want to use questions from your quiz in a &#039;&#039;&#039;Lesson&#039;&#039;&#039;?  Export the question category in say a GIFT format, then use a text editor to delete questions, or perhaps use a search and replace function to change names or places.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.heroku.com Moodle XML Converter] Convert your questions online into Moodle XML format. Allows to create questions from existing textfiles that should to be preformatted in a simple way. Supports TeX formulas, HTML and image embedded questions. Also can generate *.txt file from Moodle XML in case you need to export your questions in textfile.   &lt;br /&gt;
* The help button link next to the import file button gives a lot of detail about each format in a popup window.&lt;br /&gt;
* Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=51316 escaping problem in gift import?] forum discussion&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Converting files to UTF-8]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Import and export FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/user.php?id=726938&amp;amp;course=5 Eoin Campbell is working on a XSLT based import/export module for Word] - stay tuned! &lt;br /&gt;
*[http://www.moodle2word.net website for converting Moodle Questions into tables in a Microsoft Word file, and vice versa].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Fragen importieren]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[eu:Galderak_inportatu]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Importer des questions]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:問題のインポート]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tjuly</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Export_questions&amp;diff=74231</id>
		<title>Export questions</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Export_questions&amp;diff=74231"/>
		<updated>2010-07-27T16:33:30Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tjuly: /* See also */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Questions may be exported from the [[Quiz module]] and the [[Question bank]] in any one of 4 formats: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[GIFT format]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Moodle XML format]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[IMS QTI 2.0 format]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[XHTML format]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Process==&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the export tab.  &lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Question bank export.png|thumb|center|Export tab in Question bank]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the file type for the exported file.&lt;br /&gt;
*Use the pulldown menu to select the question category&lt;br /&gt;
*Check if you want the category name to exported and/or the context (Course is a context). &lt;br /&gt;
*Click on the export questions to file button&lt;br /&gt;
*An HTML popup window will show you the questions which have been exported.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Question bank Exported questions.png|thumb|center|Exported questions screen]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*The file has been saved in your course files (course admin block), backup&amp;gt;quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Example uses of exported files==&lt;br /&gt;
*GIFT and Moodle XML formats can be imported into the [[Lesson module]] And [[Question bank]] via [[Import questions|an import question process]].&lt;br /&gt;
*Exported question files on one server, can be imported into another Moodle site/server&lt;br /&gt;
*GIFT and Moodle XML formats can be tweaked to create word processing or spreadsheet documents suitable for paper tests or vetting.&lt;br /&gt;
*In case you want to convert your Moodle XML file into text format  upload XML to [http://moodle.heroku.com http://moodle.heroku.com]. It automatically generates *.txt with your questions&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.heroku.com Moodle XML Converter] to generate in and from XML.&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://www.moodle2word.net Website for converting Moodle Questions into tables in a Microsoft Word file, and vice versa].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Questions]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Fragen exportieren]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[eu:Galderak_esportatu]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Exporter des questions]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:問題のエクスポート]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tjuly</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Export_questions&amp;diff=74230</id>
		<title>Export questions</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Export_questions&amp;diff=74230"/>
		<updated>2010-07-27T16:32:12Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tjuly: /* Example uses of exported files */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Questions may be exported from the [[Quiz module]] and the [[Question bank]] in any one of 4 formats: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[GIFT format]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Moodle XML format]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[IMS QTI 2.0 format]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[XHTML format]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Process==&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the export tab.  &lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Question bank export.png|thumb|center|Export tab in Question bank]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the file type for the exported file.&lt;br /&gt;
*Use the pulldown menu to select the question category&lt;br /&gt;
*Check if you want the category name to exported and/or the context (Course is a context). &lt;br /&gt;
*Click on the export questions to file button&lt;br /&gt;
*An HTML popup window will show you the questions which have been exported.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Question bank Exported questions.png|thumb|center|Exported questions screen]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*The file has been saved in your course files (course admin block), backup&amp;gt;quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Example uses of exported files==&lt;br /&gt;
*GIFT and Moodle XML formats can be imported into the [[Lesson module]] And [[Question bank]] via [[Import questions|an import question process]].&lt;br /&gt;
*Exported question files on one server, can be imported into another Moodle site/server&lt;br /&gt;
*GIFT and Moodle XML formats can be tweaked to create word processing or spreadsheet documents suitable for paper tests or vetting.&lt;br /&gt;
*In case you want to convert your Moodle XML file into text format  upload XML to [http://moodle.heroku.com http://moodle.heroku.com]. It automatically generates *.txt with your questions&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://www.moodle2word.net Website for converting Moodle Questions into tables in a Microsoft Word file, and vice versa].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Questions]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Fragen exportieren]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[eu:Galderak_esportatu]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Exporter des questions]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:問題のエクスポート]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tjuly</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Import_and_export_FAQ&amp;diff=73509</id>
		<title>Import and export FAQ</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Import_and_export_FAQ&amp;diff=73509"/>
		<updated>2010-07-02T07:48:16Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tjuly: /* How do I import and export questions? */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== How do I import users? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* See [[Upload users]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How do I import course data? ==&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
* See [[Import course data]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I import and export grades?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Grade import]] (for Moodle 1.9 onwards).&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Grade export]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How do I import glossary entries? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For details see [[Import glossary entries]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Very useful tools are:&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.heroku.com/questions/glossary Online XML converter] Create XML online from text. Supports all glossary options and supports different types of input entries - Excel, concept - definition, Concept &amp;lt;break&amp;gt; definition, and some others. &lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.irpens.co.uk/moodle/MoodleExcelToGlossary.xls David Fountain&#039;s Excel macro] An Excel workbook with macros to create an XML file.&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=91224&amp;amp;parent=489666 Yasu Imao&#039;s Moodle glossaryXMLconverter_html 4] A JavaScript based converter, works directly in your browser.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How do I import and export database entries? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Database export]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Adding a database entry]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== How can I enable Excel export for students? ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the Database activity you have the ability to allow students to export all the data in the following formats: CSV, Excel and ODS (OpenDocument Spreadsheet from OpenOffice).&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:ExportTab.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With this functionality students can choose to export the data of all fields or only of selected fields. (Picture fields cannot be exported.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, this feature is not enabled by default for students. You need to override the student permissions for the Database activity and choose &#039;Allow&#039; for the permission to &#039;View presets from all users&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:EnableExportView.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will result in the &#039;Export&#039; tab being visible to students in the Database activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also see [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=133712 this thread] for a discussion on this.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I import and export questions?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* See [[Import questions]] and [[Export questions]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.heroku.com Moodle XML converter] Free online service to create quizzes and glossaries from existing files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;OpenOffice&#039;&#039;&#039; template for creating questions in [[GIFT|GIFT format]]: http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=20705&amp;amp;parent=168385&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;MS Word&#039;&#039;&#039; template for creating questions in [[GIFT|GIFT format]]: http://www.soberit.hut.fi/sprg/resources/moodle/GiftConverter.html&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Excel&#039;&#039;&#039; to [[GIFT|GIFT format]] export tool: http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=66660&lt;br /&gt;
* The complete list: [[GIFT#Word_processors_and_Spreadsheets_tools_that_create_GIFTs|Word processors and Spreadsheets tools that create GIFTs]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Importing &amp;quot;GIFT&amp;quot; format files: https://www.acquin.org/moodle/help.php?file=formatgift.html&amp;amp;module=quiz&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://software.cristianoleoni.com/freebies/glossaryconv.php ATutor to Moodle converter] - see http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=115338.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/user.php?id=726938&amp;amp;course=5 Eoin Campbell is working on a XSLT based import/export module for Word] - stay tuned! &lt;br /&gt;
: See also his [http://www.moodle2word.net website for converting Moodle Questions into tables in a Microsoft Word file, and vice versa].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Which formats are used for importing questions?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to create questions outside of Moodle these two text based formats might be the most important:&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
*[[GIFT]] - Moodle &#039;proprietary&#039; text format for import and export. Reasonably comprehensive.&lt;br /&gt;
: See [[GIFT format]].&lt;br /&gt;
: Here is a 2-column GIFT format reference sheet: [http://buypct.com/gift_reference.pdf GIFT Reference Sheet]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Moodle XML]] - Moodle &#039;proprietary&#039; xml format for import and export. Very comprehensive. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You find the complete list of supported formats under [[Import questions]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Which file formats can I use? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== What encodings should I use? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The recommended standard encoding for all Moodle files is [[UTF-8]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* See [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=62251 Importing Entries Using a Text File] for an example where a UTF-8 file with [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Byte-order_mark BOM] caused Database Activity entries not being imported. See also MDL-9075 (&amp;quot;User Upload Failure when file contains UTF-8 BOM&amp;quot;).&lt;br /&gt;
: Some of this information is collected at [[UTF-8 and BOM]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See also: &lt;br /&gt;
* [http://morgretdesigns.wordpress.com/2008/03/07/changing-file-encoding-on-a-csv-with-openoffice-calc/ Changing File Encoding on a CSV with OpenOffice Calc]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.internet-business-solutions.gr/lang-en/e-commerce/44-strategies/65-utf-8-csv UTF-8 CSV]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:Category:UTF-8]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Search Moodle Forums [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/search.php?search=subject%3Aimport+&amp;amp;id=5 subject:import].&lt;br /&gt;
* Search Moodle Forums [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/search.php?search=subject%3Aexport+&amp;amp;id=5 subject:export].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[XML FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[IMS Common Cartridge import]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* There&#039;s an interesting project on [http://groups.drupal.org/node/21559 integrating Drupal and Moodle quizzes] in the Drupal in Education User Group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Import und Export FAQ]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tjuly</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Import_and_export_FAQ&amp;diff=73508</id>
		<title>Import and export FAQ</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Import_and_export_FAQ&amp;diff=73508"/>
		<updated>2010-07-02T07:46:53Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tjuly: /* How do I import glossary entries? */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== How do I import users? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* See [[Upload users]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How do I import course data? ==&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
* See [[Import course data]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I import and export grades?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Grade import]] (for Moodle 1.9 onwards).&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Grade export]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How do I import glossary entries? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For details see [[Import glossary entries]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Very useful tools are:&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.heroku.com/questions/glossary Online XML converter] Create XML online from text. Supports all glossary options and supports different types of input entries - Excel, concept - definition, Concept &amp;lt;break&amp;gt; definition, and some others. &lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.irpens.co.uk/moodle/MoodleExcelToGlossary.xls David Fountain&#039;s Excel macro] An Excel workbook with macros to create an XML file.&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=91224&amp;amp;parent=489666 Yasu Imao&#039;s Moodle glossaryXMLconverter_html 4] A JavaScript based converter, works directly in your browser.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How do I import and export database entries? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Database export]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Adding a database entry]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== How can I enable Excel export for students? ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the Database activity you have the ability to allow students to export all the data in the following formats: CSV, Excel and ODS (OpenDocument Spreadsheet from OpenOffice).&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:ExportTab.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With this functionality students can choose to export the data of all fields or only of selected fields. (Picture fields cannot be exported.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, this feature is not enabled by default for students. You need to override the student permissions for the Database activity and choose &#039;Allow&#039; for the permission to &#039;View presets from all users&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:EnableExportView.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will result in the &#039;Export&#039; tab being visible to students in the Database activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also see [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=133712 this thread] for a discussion on this.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I import and export questions?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* See [[Import questions]] and [[Export questions]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;OpenOffice&#039;&#039;&#039; template for creating questions in [[GIFT|GIFT format]]: http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=20705&amp;amp;parent=168385&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;MS Word&#039;&#039;&#039; template for creating questions in [[GIFT|GIFT format]]: http://www.soberit.hut.fi/sprg/resources/moodle/GiftConverter.html&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Excel&#039;&#039;&#039; to [[GIFT|GIFT format]] export tool: http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=66660&lt;br /&gt;
* The complete list: [[GIFT#Word_processors_and_Spreadsheets_tools_that_create_GIFTs|Word processors and Spreadsheets tools that create GIFTs]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Importing &amp;quot;GIFT&amp;quot; format files: https://www.acquin.org/moodle/help.php?file=formatgift.html&amp;amp;module=quiz&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://software.cristianoleoni.com/freebies/glossaryconv.php ATutor to Moodle converter] - see http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=115338.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/user.php?id=726938&amp;amp;course=5 Eoin Campbell is working on a XSLT based import/export module for Word] - stay tuned! &lt;br /&gt;
: See also his [http://www.moodle2word.net website for converting Moodle Questions into tables in a Microsoft Word file, and vice versa].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Which formats are used for importing questions?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to create questions outside of Moodle these two text based formats might be the most important:&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
*[[GIFT]] - Moodle &#039;proprietary&#039; text format for import and export. Reasonably comprehensive.&lt;br /&gt;
: See [[GIFT format]].&lt;br /&gt;
: Here is a 2-column GIFT format reference sheet: [http://buypct.com/gift_reference.pdf GIFT Reference Sheet]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Moodle XML]] - Moodle &#039;proprietary&#039; xml format for import and export. Very comprehensive. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You find the complete list of supported formats under [[Import questions]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Which file formats can I use? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== What encodings should I use? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The recommended standard encoding for all Moodle files is [[UTF-8]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* See [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=62251 Importing Entries Using a Text File] for an example where a UTF-8 file with [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Byte-order_mark BOM] caused Database Activity entries not being imported. See also MDL-9075 (&amp;quot;User Upload Failure when file contains UTF-8 BOM&amp;quot;).&lt;br /&gt;
: Some of this information is collected at [[UTF-8 and BOM]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See also: &lt;br /&gt;
* [http://morgretdesigns.wordpress.com/2008/03/07/changing-file-encoding-on-a-csv-with-openoffice-calc/ Changing File Encoding on a CSV with OpenOffice Calc]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.internet-business-solutions.gr/lang-en/e-commerce/44-strategies/65-utf-8-csv UTF-8 CSV]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:Category:UTF-8]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Search Moodle Forums [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/search.php?search=subject%3Aimport+&amp;amp;id=5 subject:import].&lt;br /&gt;
* Search Moodle Forums [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/search.php?search=subject%3Aexport+&amp;amp;id=5 subject:export].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[XML FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[IMS Common Cartridge import]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* There&#039;s an interesting project on [http://groups.drupal.org/node/21559 integrating Drupal and Moodle quizzes] in the Drupal in Education User Group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Import und Export FAQ]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tjuly</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Import_questions&amp;diff=73507</id>
		<title>Import questions</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Import_questions&amp;diff=73507"/>
		<updated>2010-07-02T07:43:14Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tjuly: /* See also */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Questions}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle has a number of different formats that can be used to import questions into [[Question bank]] categories and as [[Adding a question page|lesson question pages]]. These include some proprietary quiz software formats, as well as text files and Moodle formats. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Importing questions from an existing file==&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to import questions from a file on your network/computer or from a file that has been saved or uploaded into your course files.  The underlying [[Import_questions#Character_encoding|character encoding]] of this file is important.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Question bank import process ===&lt;br /&gt;
The question bank allows you a great deal of flexibility when importing questions. To import questions into Moodle&#039;s [[Question bank]], use the Questions link in the course administration and select the import tab. In most versions of Moodle it is also possible to get to this screen (produced by ../question/import.php) while editing an existing quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Questions import 197.png|thumb|center|Import question formats from the import tab]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Select import tab&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the question type to import&lt;br /&gt;
*General: pick the category, determine if the context and category information that maybe contained in a GIFT or XML file should be used. &lt;br /&gt;
*Select what should happen if there are no grades or an error is detected in the import process.&lt;br /&gt;
*Determine the file to import&lt;br /&gt;
**Import from file upload.  Use the browse function to import a file from your computer. Use the &amp;quot;Upload this file&amp;quot; button to import the questions.&lt;br /&gt;
**Import from file already in course files. A popup window will take you to the course files start page. Use the &amp;quot;Import from this file&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Question bank import file gen import 1.png|thumb|center|General and import file parameters sections]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Lesson module process===&lt;br /&gt;
The question types that can be imported into a lesson are similar to question bank.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Lesson Import question types.png|thumb|center|Lesson screen asking which file type will be imported]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Lesson module|Lesson]] can only import from a file located on the teachers computer.&lt;br /&gt;
*In edit, using the expanded view&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the position where questions should be inserted into the lesson&lt;br /&gt;
*Click on the Import question link between the pages.&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the file type&lt;br /&gt;
*Use the browse function to find the file on your computer&lt;br /&gt;
*Import the selected file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Question import formats==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== [[GIFT]] === &lt;br /&gt;
Moodle &#039;proprietary&#039; text format for import and export. Reasonably comprehensive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== [[Moodle XML format|Moodle XML]] ===&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle &#039;proprietary&#039; xml format for import and export. Very comprehensive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== [[Aiken]] === &lt;br /&gt;
This format is an easy way of writing multiple-choice questions for import.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Blackboard === &lt;br /&gt;
From Moodle 1.7 onwards, if you&#039;re converting from Blackboard to Moodle, you can export your course and then import the question pools into Moodle using the Blackboard &amp;quot;POOL&amp;quot; type export format. It relies on XML functions being compiled into your PHP. Note that you must first unpack the exported zip file and provide Moodle with the appropriate .dat file. Note that this version does not work with Blackboard Version 6 and newer. (Use this format for ExamView 5 or 6)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Blackboard V6+ === &lt;br /&gt;
This module can import questions saved in Blackboard&#039;s export format. It provides limited support for Blackboard Version 6 and 7. It relies on XML functions being compiled into your PHP. You must upload the zip file exported from Blackboard. Note that this format only imports the main data file from the zip. Any other data (e.g. images) is ignored.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Course Test Manager === &lt;br /&gt;
This format enables you to import questions from the Course Test Manager from Course Technology.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== [[Embedded Answers (Cloze) question type|Embedded Answers (Cloze)]] === &lt;br /&gt;
This format is a multiple question, multiple answer question with embedded answers. They can be a bit tricky to develop, but they are a unique way of asking questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Examview === &lt;br /&gt;
ExamView 4 supported an XML export format that Moodle can import.  If you are using a newer version of ExamView, you should export using Blackboard, extract the zip archive ExamView creates, then import in Moodle using Blackboard format (do not use 6+ format for moodle import, even though exam view calls this a Blackboard6+ file--it isn&#039;t).  You can choose one of the &amp;quot;.dat&amp;quot; files from the ExamView archive to import.  Note that images are not currently imported.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any questions that included images must be edited to &amp;quot;re-link&amp;quot; those images.  The image files can be found in the file folder that is in your item test bank directory of your course files. Click the edit tool next to a question in the question list.  If one or more images files are included in the question, you should see a placeholder with the image file name in it embedded with text in the text edit window.  Click on the placeholder and then click on the insert image tool of the text editor.  Navigate to the folder containing the image files. (It will be in the folder you uploaded the zipped question bank to).  Find the file with the same name as indicated in the image placeholder.  Type the alternate text then click &amp;quot;okay&amp;quot; to re-link the image.  Click on &amp;quot;okay&amp;quot; to return to the question list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===[[Hot Potatoes]]===&lt;br /&gt;
A freeware program that can export questions into Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Learnwise===&lt;br /&gt;
This format can import multiple choice questions saved in Learnwise&#039;s XML format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===[[Missing word question format|Missing word]]===&lt;br /&gt;
This format is only used for  multiple choice questions and short answer questions, similar to GIFT.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== [[WebCT format]] === &lt;br /&gt;
This format supports importing multiple choice and short answers questions from WebCT&#039;s text format. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Caution:&#039;&#039;&#039; Keep in mind that WebCT allows more than one &amp;quot;blank&amp;quot; per short answer question; whereas, Moodle will only accommodate one blank per question. Questions that used multiple short answers in a question will not convert successfully.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Importing from other programs==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Diploma 6 ===&lt;br /&gt;
Diploma 6 also supports an XML export format that Moodle can import. If you are using a newer version of Diploma, here are the steps to  to export from Diploma and import to Moodle.  The steps are the same as those for Examview (see above).&lt;br /&gt;
*Export with the Blackboard LS 6.0 – 6.2 format. &lt;br /&gt;
*Upload the zip file to your course files and unzip the file.  Do not use the unzip feature in the quiz module – it won’t work. This will create a .dat file and a folder of images (if any of your questions included images).  &lt;br /&gt;
*Import the .dat file using the plain Blackboard (not the Blackboard 6.0 – 6.2) format.  The images are not imported at the same time, but they are available in that other folder that was in the zip file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As with Examview, any questions that include images must be edited to reestablish the links to those images. &lt;br /&gt;
*First, click the edit tool next to a question in the question list.  If there are any images in the question, you will see a placeholder with the image file name in it.  &lt;br /&gt;
*Click on the placeholder, and then the insert image tool of the text editor.  &lt;br /&gt;
*Navigate to the folder containing the image.  &lt;br /&gt;
*Find the file with the same name as the one in the placeholder, and select it.  Type the alternate text, and then click “OK” to relink the image, and then “OK” again to return to the question list.&lt;br /&gt;
See also: [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=102072] and [http://www.screencast.com/t/zydIQ55f&lt;br /&gt;
]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Old formats===&lt;br /&gt;
*AON -This format is the same as the missing word format, except it creates matching questions from the multiple choice questions. Please note that from Moodle 1.8 it will no longer be part of the standard Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Character encoding ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is important that the imported file is encoded in the [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/UTF-8 UTF-8] standard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this is not adhered to you may get import errors and/or strange characters in the imported materials. If the file is not UTF-8, an external tool must be used to change the encoding. Note that if only basic &#039;latin&#039; characters are used, then the coding issue can generally be ignored. Be particularly careful when creating questions using Microsoft Word. For reasons best known to themselves, Microsoft used their own encoding for some characters (incompatible with UTF-8) and this is likely to break the import.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;If you are having problems with the first question (or category modifier) in the file being misinterpreted (this particularly applies to GIFT format) it might be your editor adding a &amp;quot;Byte-Order-Mark&amp;quot; character at the beginning of the file. This is particularly common in Windows programs (e.g. Notepad) and is another good reason to steer clear of Microsoft products for text editing (as apposed to word processing). There are plenty of free or low cost text editors available for download. The BOM is neither recommended or required as UTF8 does not have [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Byte-order_mark byte order issues].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Match grades==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Imported grades must match one of the fixed list of valid grades, as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 100, 90, 80, 75, 70, 66.666, 60, 50, 40, 33.333, 30, 25, 20, 16.666, 14.2857, 12.5, 11.111, 10, 5, 0&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
negative values of the above list are also permitted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two settings for this switch. They affect how the import routine treats values that do not exactly match one of the values in the above list&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Error if grade not listed - If a question contains any grades not found in the list an error is displayed and that question will not be imported.&lt;br /&gt;
* Nearest grade if not listed - If a grade is found that does not match a value in the list, the grade is changed to the closest matching value in the list&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: some custom import formats write directly to the database and may bypass this check.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tips and tricks==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;TIP:&#039;&#039; It may be easier and faster to type many questions into a &#039;&#039;&#039;single text file&#039;&#039;&#039;, than to create a series of Quiz or Lesson question pages.  Some teachers report that once they master creating questions in one of the formats to import, they do not have to wait for their Moodle site screen to refresh and the process of selecting the next question type to create.   &lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;TIP:&#039;&#039; Want to use questions from your quiz in a &#039;&#039;&#039;Lesson&#039;&#039;&#039;?  Export the question category in say a GIFT format, then use a text editor to delete questions, or perhaps use a search and replace function to change names or places.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.heroku.com Moodle XML Converter] Convert your questions online into Moodle XML format. Allows to create questions from existing textfiles that should to be preformatted in simple way. Supports TeX formulas, HTML and image embedded questions.    &lt;br /&gt;
* The help button link next to the import file button gives a lot of detail about each format in a popup window.&lt;br /&gt;
* Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=51316 escaping problem in gift import?] forum discussion&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Converting files to UTF-8]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Import and export FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/user.php?id=726938&amp;amp;course=5 Eoin Campbell is working on a XSLT based import/export module for Word] - stay tuned! &lt;br /&gt;
*[http://www.moodle2word.net website for converting Moodle Questions into tables in a Microsoft Word file, and vice versa].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Fragen importieren]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[eu:Galderak_inportatu]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Importer des questions]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:問題のインポート]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tjuly</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=GIFT_format&amp;diff=73505</id>
		<title>GIFT format</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=GIFT_format&amp;diff=73505"/>
		<updated>2010-07-02T07:37:14Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tjuly: /* External links */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;GIFT format allows someone to use a text editor to write multiple-choice, true-false, short answer, matching missing word and numerical questions in a simple format that can be imported. The GIFT format is also an export file format available in Question bank. The format has been developed within the Moodle Community but other software may support it to a greater or lesser degree.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*When creating a large numbers of questions, GIFT can provide a quick way of bulk loading questions either into a [[Question bank|question category]], or into a [[Adding_a_question_page#Importing_questions|Lesson]]. &lt;br /&gt;
*Sometimes it is easier proofing questions in a question category by viewing them in a GIFT file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== General instructions ==&lt;br /&gt;
At least one blank line must be left between each question. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the simple form, the question comes first, then the answers are set in between brackets, with an equal sign indicating the correct answer(s) and tilde the wrong answers.  A Number sign will insert a response.  Questions can be weighted by placing percentage signs around the weight.  Comments are preceded by double slashes and are not imported.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here are some useful [http://moodle.org/file.php/5/moddata/forum/121/236161/GIFT-examples.zip GIFT examples] than can be imported or used as rough template.  Many of the examples below used the questions in the file as a starting point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== UTF-8 encoding ===&lt;br /&gt;
Any GIFT file &#039;&#039;&#039;must&#039;&#039;&#039; be correctly encoded in [[UTF8]]. You can use Microsoft&#039;s text editor Notepad which comes with Windows to save your file in UTF-8. &#039;&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039;&#039;: ANSI format will (only) work for languages without any special characters (like ä, ö, ü, æ, å, ø, œ or ß). And don&#039;t use &amp;quot;Unicode&amp;quot; as format as this is actually UTF-16 and won&#039;t work. See [[Converting files to UTF-8]] for further information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Format symbols===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here are some common GIFT symbols and their use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
! Symbols !! Use&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| // text || Comment until end of line (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ::title:: || Question title (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| text || Question text (becomes title if no title specified)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| { || Start answer(s) -- without any answers, text is a description of following questions&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| {T} or {F} || True or False answer; also {TRUE} and {FALSE}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| { ... =right ... } || Correct answer for multiple choice, (multiple answer? -- see page comments) or fill-in-the-blank&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| { ... ~wrong ... } || Incorrect answer for multiple choice or multiple answer&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| { ... =item -&amp;gt; match ... } || Answer for matching questions&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| #feedback text || Answer feedback for preceding multiple, fill-in-the-blank, or numeric answers&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| {# || Start numeric answer(s)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| answer:tolerance || Numeric answer accepted within ± tolerance range&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| low..high || Lower and upper range values of accepted numeric answer &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| =%n%answer:tolerance || n percent credit for one of multiple numeric ranges within tolerance from answer&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| } || End answer(s)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| \character || Backslash escapes the special meaning of ~, =, #, {, }, and :&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| \n || Places a newline in question text -- blank lines delimit questions&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here are some quick examples:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // true/false&lt;br /&gt;
 ::Q1:: 1+1=2 {T}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 // multiple choice with specified feedback for right and wrong answers&lt;br /&gt;
 ::Q2:: What&#039;s between orange and green in the spectrum? &lt;br /&gt;
 { =yellow # right; good! ~red # wrong, it&#039;s yellow ~blue # wrong, it&#039;s yellow }&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 // fill-in-the-blank&lt;br /&gt;
 ::Q3:: Two plus {=two =2} equals four.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 // matching&lt;br /&gt;
 ::Q4:: Which animal eats which food? { =cat -&amp;gt; cat food =dog -&amp;gt; dog food }&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 // math range question&lt;br /&gt;
 ::Q5:: What is a number from 1 to 5? {#3:2}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 // math range specified with interval end points&lt;br /&gt;
 ::Q6:: What is a number from 1 to 5? {#1..5}&lt;br /&gt;
 // translated on import to the same as Q5, but unavailable from Moodle question interface&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 // multiple numeric answers with partial credit and feedback&lt;br /&gt;
 ::Q7:: When was Ulysses S. Grant born? {#&lt;br /&gt;
          =1822:0      # Correct! Full credit.&lt;br /&gt;
          =%50%1822:2  # He was born in 1822. Half credit for being close.&lt;br /&gt;
 }&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 // essay&lt;br /&gt;
 ::Q8:: How are you? {}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Format symbols explained===&lt;br /&gt;
The multiple choice format below as a comment line // for the question, when Moodle exports it the question unique id number will appear here.  The first set of  :: precedes the question title. The second :: precedes the actual question. The first { indicates the start of the answers.  The correct answer is preceded by an = sign and wrong answers by a ~.  Teacher responses have a # in front of them.  The question ends with a } and then a blank line. NOTE it is { } not ( ) parenthesis! Usually these are gotten with help of the [AltGr] key.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 //Comment line &lt;br /&gt;
 ::Question title &lt;br /&gt;
 :: Question {&lt;br /&gt;
 =A correct answer&lt;br /&gt;
 ~Wrong answer1&lt;br /&gt;
 #A response to wrong answer1&lt;br /&gt;
 ~Wrong answer2&lt;br /&gt;
 #A response to wrong answer2&lt;br /&gt;
 ~Wrong answer3&lt;br /&gt;
 #A response to wrong answer3&lt;br /&gt;
 ~Wrong answer4&lt;br /&gt;
 #A response to wrong answer4&lt;br /&gt;
 }&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The shortest format for a multiple choice question is:&lt;br /&gt;
 Question{= A Correct Answer ~Wrong answer1 ~Wrong answer2 ~Wrong answer3 ~Wrong answer4 }&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;Tip:&#039;&#039; If you don&#039;t specify a question title the WHOLE question will be used as the title at the time of import into Moodle. There are pros and cons to allowing this to happen. Cons: This can add a lot of unnecessary words. This can include characters which might confuse the export GIFT process.  Pros: On the other hand. if the start of each question is different, it can make finding a single question easier in a category list of questions. It will save you typing.  Having the same title for every question is a very bad idea.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Question format examples==&lt;br /&gt;
There are several ways to use a text editor to write a GIFT format.  We will try to show the simple version for example and in some formats we will introduce some more complex features that can be imported into many Moodle Question formats.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Multiple choice===&lt;br /&gt;
For multiple choice questions, wrong answers are prefixed with a tilde (~) and the correct answer is prefixed with an equal sign (=).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is a simple acceptable GIFT multiple choice format:&lt;br /&gt;
 Who&#039;s buried in Grant&#039;s tomb?{=Grant ~no one ~Napoleon ~Churchill ~Mother Teresa }&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is a longer format that uses most of the GIFT elements:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  // question: 1 name: Grants tomb&lt;br /&gt;
 ::Grants tomb::Who is buried in Grant&#039;s tomb in New York City? {&lt;br /&gt;
 =Grant&lt;br /&gt;
 ~No one&lt;br /&gt;
 #Was true for 12 years, but Grant&#039;s remains were buried in the tomb in 1897&lt;br /&gt;
 ~Napoleon&lt;br /&gt;
 #He was buried in France&lt;br /&gt;
 ~Churchill&lt;br /&gt;
 #He was buried in England&lt;br /&gt;
 ~Mother Teresa&lt;br /&gt;
 #She was buried in India&lt;br /&gt;
 }&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===True-false===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this question-type the answer indicates whether the statement is true or false. The answer should be written as {TRUE} or {FALSE}, or abbreviated to {T} or {F}.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // question: 0 name: TrueStatement using {T} style&lt;br /&gt;
 ::TrueStatement about Grant::Grant was buried in a tomb in New York City.{T}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 // question: 0 name: FalseStatement using {FALSE} style&lt;br /&gt;
 ::FalseStatement about sun::The sun rises in the West.{FALSE}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Short answer===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Answers in Short Answer question-type are all prefixed by an equal sign (=), indicating that they are all correct answers. The answers must not contain a tilde.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here are two examples using the simple method showing possible right answers for credit.&lt;br /&gt;
 Who&#039;s buried in Grant&#039;s tomb?{=Grant =Ulysses S. Grant =Ulysses Grant}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Two plus two equals {=four =4}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If there is only one correct Short Answer, it may be written without the equal sign prefix, as long as it cannot be confused as True-False.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Matching===&lt;br /&gt;
Matching pairs begin with an equal sign (=) and are separated by this symbol &amp;quot;-&amp;gt;&amp;quot;. There must be at least three matching pairs.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 Match the following countries with their corresponding capitals. {&lt;br /&gt;
    =Canada -&amp;gt; Ottawa&lt;br /&gt;
    =Italy  -&amp;gt; Rome&lt;br /&gt;
    =Japan  -&amp;gt; Tokyo&lt;br /&gt;
    =India  -&amp;gt; New Delhi&lt;br /&gt;
    }&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Matching questions do not support feedback or percentage answer weights.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Missing word===&lt;br /&gt;
The Missing Word format automatically inserts a fill-in-the-blank line (like this _____) in the middle of the sentence. To use the Missing Word format, place the answers where you want the line to appear in the sentence.&lt;br /&gt;
 Moodle costd{~lots of money =nothing ~a small amount} to download from moodle.org.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the answers come before the closing punctuation mark, a fill-in-the-blank line will be inserted for the &amp;quot;missing word&amp;quot; format. All question types can be written in the Missing Word format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There must be a blank line (double carriage return) separating questions. For clarity, the answers can be written on separate lines and even indented. Some examples:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Mahatma Gandhi birthday is an Indian holiday on  {&lt;br /&gt;
 ~15th&lt;br /&gt;
 ~3rd&lt;br /&gt;
 =2nd&lt;br /&gt;
 } of October.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 Since {&lt;br /&gt;
   ~495 AD&lt;br /&gt;
   =1066 AD&lt;br /&gt;
   ~1215 AD&lt;br /&gt;
   ~ 43 AD&lt;br /&gt;
 }&lt;br /&gt;
 the town of Hastings England has been &amp;quot;famous with visitors&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Numerical questions===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The answer section for Numerical questions must start with a number sign (#). Numerical answers can include an error margin, which is written following the correct answer, separated by a colon. So for example, if the correct answer is anything between 1.5 and 2.5, then it would be written as follows {#2:0.5}. This indicates that 2 with an error margin of 0.5 is correct (i.e., the span from 1.5 to 2.5). If no error margin is specified, it will be assumed to be zero.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is a simple numerical format question. It will accept a range of 5 years.&lt;br /&gt;
 When was Ulysses S. Grant born?{#1822:5}&lt;br /&gt;
It is a good idea to check the margins of the range, 3.141 is not counted as correct and 3.142 is considered in the range. &lt;br /&gt;
 What is the value of pi (to 3 decimal places)? {#3.14159:0.0005}.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Optionally, numerical answers can be written as a span in the following format {#MinimumValue..MaximumValue}.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 What is the value of pi (to 3 decimal places)? {#3.141..3.142}.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle&#039;s browser interface does not support multiple numerical answers, but Moodle&#039;s code can and so does GIFT. This can be used to specify numerical multiple spans, and can be particularly usefully when combined with percentage weight grades. If multiple answers are used, they must be separated by an equal sign, like short answer questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 When was Ulysses S. Grant born? {#&lt;br /&gt;
    =1822:0&lt;br /&gt;
    =%50%1822:2&lt;br /&gt;
 }&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that since Moodle&#039;s browser GUI doesn&#039;t support multiple answers for Numerical questions, there&#039;s no way to see them or edit them through Moodle. The only way to change a numerical answer beyond the first, is to delete the question and re-import it (or use something like phpMyAdmin).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Essay===&lt;br /&gt;
An essay question is simply a question with an empty answer field. Nothing is permitted between the curly braces at all.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Write a short biography of Dag Hammarskjöld. {}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Description===&lt;br /&gt;
A description &amp;quot;question&amp;quot; has no answer part at all&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 You can use your pencil and paper for these next math questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Options==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition to these basic question types, this filter offers the following options: line comments, question name, feedback and percentage answer weight.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Line Comments===&lt;br /&gt;
Comments that will not be imported into Moodle can be included in the text file. This can be used to provide headers or more information about questions. All lines that start with a double backslash (not counting tabs or spaces) will be ignored by the filter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Subheading: Numerical questions below&lt;br /&gt;
 What&#039;s 2 plus 2? {#4}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Comments will be exported from Moodle and will include the unique question id.  The above question after it was imported and then exported from Moodle:&lt;br /&gt;
 // question: 914  name: What&#039;s 2 plus 2? &lt;br /&gt;
 ::What&#039;s 2 plus 2?::What&#039;s 2 plus 2?{#&lt;br /&gt;
     =4:0#&lt;br /&gt;
 }&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Question Name===&lt;br /&gt;
A question name can be specified by placing it first and enclosing it within double colons.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 ::Kanji Origins::Japanese characters originally&lt;br /&gt;
 came from what country? {=China}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 ::Thanksgiving Date::The American holiday of Thanksgiving is &lt;br /&gt;
 celebrated on the {~second ~third =fourth} Thursday of November.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If no question name is specified, the entire question will be used as the name by default.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Feedback===&lt;br /&gt;
Feedback can be included for each answer by following the answer with a number sign (# also known as a hash mark) and the feedback.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 What&#039;s the answer to this multiple-choice question? {&lt;br /&gt;
   ~wrong answer#feedback comment on the wrong answer&lt;br /&gt;
   ~another wrong answer#feedback comment on this wrong answer&lt;br /&gt;
   =right answer#Very good!&lt;br /&gt;
 }&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
 //From The Hitchhiker&#039;s Guide to the Galaxy&lt;br /&gt;
 Deep Thought said &amp;quot; {&lt;br /&gt;
   =forty two#Correct according to The Hitchhiker&#039;s Guide to the Galaxy!&lt;br /&gt;
   =42#Correct, as told to Loonquawl and Phouchg&lt;br /&gt;
   =forty-two#Correct!&lt;br /&gt;
 }  is the Ultimate Answer to the Ultimate Question of Life, The Universe, and Everything.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
    42 is the Absolute Answer to everything.{&lt;br /&gt;
 FALSE#42is the Ultimate Answer.#You gave the right answer.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For Multiple Choice questions, feedback is displayed only for the answer the student selected. For short answer, feedback is shown only when students input the corresponding correct answer. For true-false questions, there can be one or two feedback strings. The first is shown if the student gives the wrong answer. The second if the student gives the right answer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Percentage Answer Weights===&lt;br /&gt;
Percentage answer weights are available for both Multiple Choice and Short Answer questions. Percentage answer weights can be included by following the tilde (for Multiple Choice) or equal sign (for Short Answer) with the desired percent enclosed within percent signs (e.g., %50%). This option can be combined with feedback comments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Difficult question.{~wrong answer ~%50%half credit answer =full credit answer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 ::Jesus&#039; hometown::Jesus Christ was from {&lt;br /&gt;
    ~Jerusalem#This was an important city, but the wrong answer.&lt;br /&gt;
    ~%25%Bethlehem#He was born here, but not raised here.&lt;br /&gt;
    ~%50%Galilee#You need to be more specific.&lt;br /&gt;
    =Nazareth#Yes! That&#039;s right!&lt;br /&gt;
 }.&lt;br /&gt;
     &lt;br /&gt;
 ::Jesus&#039; hometown:: Jesus Christ was from {&lt;br /&gt;
    =Nazareth#Yes! That&#039;s right!&lt;br /&gt;
    =%75%Nazereth#Right, but misspelled.&lt;br /&gt;
    =%25%Bethlehem#He was born here, but not raised here.&lt;br /&gt;
 }&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that the last two examples are essentially the same question, first as multiple choice and then as short answer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that it is possible to specify percentage answer weights that are NOT available through the browser interface. The Match Grades drop-down on the import page determines how these are handled. You can either request that an error be reported or that the answer weight be adjusted to the nearest valid answer weight.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specify text-formatting for the question&lt;br /&gt;
The question text (only) may have an optional text format specified. Currently the available formats are moodle (Moodle Auto-Format), html (HTML format), plain (Plain text format) and markdown (Markdown format). The format is specified in square brackets immediately before the question text. See [[Formatting text]] for further information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 [markdown]The *American holiday of Thanksgiving* is celebrated on the {&lt;br /&gt;
    ~second&lt;br /&gt;
    ~third&lt;br /&gt;
    =fourth&lt;br /&gt;
 } Thursday of November.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Multiple Answers===&lt;br /&gt;
The Multiple Answers option is used for multiple choice questions when two or more answers must be selected in order to obtain full credit. The multiple answers option is enabled by assigning partial answer weight to multiple answers, while allowing no single answer to receive full credit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 What two people are entombed in Grant&#039;s tomb? {&lt;br /&gt;
    ~No one&lt;br /&gt;
    ~%50%Grant&lt;br /&gt;
    ~%50%Grant&#039;s wife&lt;br /&gt;
    ~Grant&#039;s father&lt;br /&gt;
 }&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that there is no equal sign (=) in any answer and the answers should total no more than 100%, otherwise Moodle will return an error. To avoid the problem of students automatically getting 100% by simply checking all of the answers, it is best to include negative answer weights for wrong answers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 What two people are entombed in Grant&#039;s tomb? {&lt;br /&gt;
    ~%-50%No one&lt;br /&gt;
    ~%50%Grant&lt;br /&gt;
    ~%50%Grant&#039;s wife&lt;br /&gt;
    ~%-50%Grant&#039;s father&lt;br /&gt;
 }&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Special Characters ~ = # { }===&lt;br /&gt;
These symbols ~ = # { } : control the operation of this filter and cannot be used as normal text within questions. Since these symbols have a special role in determining the operation of this filter, they are called &amp;quot;control characters.&amp;quot; But sometimes you may want to use one of these characters, for example to show a mathematical formula in a question. The way to get around this problem is &amp;quot;escaping&amp;quot; the control characters. This means simply putting a backslash (\) before a control character so the filter will know that you want to use it as a literal character instead of as a control character. For example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Which answer equals 5? {&lt;br /&gt;
    ~ \= 2 + 2&lt;br /&gt;
    = \= 2 + 3&lt;br /&gt;
    ~ \= 2 + 4&lt;br /&gt;
 }&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 ::GIFT Control Characters::&lt;br /&gt;
 Which of the following is NOT a control character for the GIFT import format? {&lt;br /&gt;
   ~ \~     # \~ is a control character.&lt;br /&gt;
   ~ \=     # \= is a control character.&lt;br /&gt;
   ~ \#     # \# is a control character.&lt;br /&gt;
   ~ \{     # \{ is a control character.&lt;br /&gt;
   ~ \}     # \} is a control character.&lt;br /&gt;
   = \      # Correct! \ (backslash) is not a control character. BUT,&lt;br /&gt;
              it is used to escape the control characters.&lt;br /&gt;
 }&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the question is processed, the backslash is removed and is not saved in Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Specifying Categories===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to change the category into which the questions are added within the GIFT file. You can change the category as many times as you wish within the file. All questions after the modifier up to the next modifier or the end of the file will be added to the specified category. Up to the first category modifier the category specified on the import screen will be used. Note that for this to work the from file: box must be ticked on the import screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To include a category modifier include a line like this (with a blank line before and after):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 $CATEGORY: tom/dick/harry&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
or simply&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 $CATEGORY: mycategory&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
...the first example specifies a path of nested categories. In this cae the questions will go into harry. The categories are created if they do not exist.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Making questions case sensitive===&lt;br /&gt;
Short Answer questions can be made case sensitive by changing &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; to &amp;quot;1&amp;quot; in the following line:&lt;br /&gt;
 $question-&amp;gt;usecase = 0; // Ignore case&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Hints and Tips==&lt;br /&gt;
* Use the ::title:: at the beginning of every question to organize your questions when Moodle presents a list or exports them as another GIFT file.  When the title is left blank, Moodle will put the beginning of the question as the title. Some teachers want to see something like &amp;quot;001 LIT101 Poe ref Purloin Letter&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;The Purloin Letter was written by (AmLit pg 254)&amp;quot; in the title.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* You can specify markup if you need to format the question by setting [html], [moodle], [plain] or [markdown] just before the question text. See more about this in the reference pdf below.&lt;br /&gt;
* In the Lesson module, in a question page, correct answers jump by default to Next page and incorrect answers jump to This page (i.e. student has to &amp;quot;try again&amp;quot;). When importing from a GIFT format file, this is exactly the mechanism which is used.&lt;br /&gt;
* If you want a student to be taken directly from one question to the next irrespective of their answer being correct or incorrect: in the Lesson Settings, set Maximum number of attempts: to 1. &lt;br /&gt;
**Please note, however, that a message &amp;quot;correct / incorrect&amp;quot; will still be displayed to the student upon answering each question. If you do not want this (default) feedback message to be displayed then enter your own feedback message (i.e. &amp;quot;continue&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;---&amp;quot;, etc.) &lt;br /&gt;
**In case you want no visible message displayed then enter a non-breaking space as feedback. Moodle will not put it&#039;s automatic response because it sees the blank space. To do this, put a # after the answer and write [[Image:Nbsp.png]] (without spaces between these characters). &lt;br /&gt;
* Need to use a special GIFT character in your question or answer?  Put a \ in front of the GIFT character.  &lt;br /&gt;
**For example if you want to use curly braces, { or }, or equal sign, =, or # or ~ in a GIFT file (in a math question including TeX expressions) you must &amp;quot;escape&amp;quot; them by preceding them with a \ directly in front of each { or } or =. It is possible to use a replace program/macro/editor filter to do this conversion before importing to Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
* Want to change T/F type questions to multiple choice? Consider exporting the T/F questions as a GIFT file, then using a text editor to replace the (T) with (=True ~False). Perhaps change the title slightly so you will recognize the new questions.&lt;br /&gt;
* Alphabetic case-sensitive comparison is disabled by default. If you need case-sensitive comparison for short answer questions (an unusual need), precede them with:&lt;br /&gt;
   $question-&amp;gt;usecase = 1;&lt;br /&gt;
surrounded by blank lines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Word processors and Spreadsheets tools that create GIFTs==&lt;br /&gt;
Several contributors have used macros to generate GIFT files from a more familiar popular programs.&lt;br /&gt;
* Similar to GIFT format but more human-readable - [http://moodle.heroku.com Moodle XML Converter]. Convert your questions online from existing textfiles. Examples are provided on site. &lt;br /&gt;
* There are Word macros available for easily creating GIFT files. See [http://www.moodleschool.co.nz/mod/resource/view.php?id=83 Moodle4Teachers] for downloads and instructions for use.&lt;br /&gt;
* There are several Excel spreadsheets for generating GIFT files. Several people have built upon other contributors work.  &lt;br /&gt;
**The latest version was posted on 10 April 2007 and can be found in this thread with this file name: [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=66660 Excel2GIFTv1.1.zip by Timothy Takemoto].  There is also a set of instructions Excel2GIFTv1.1_Instructions.rtf by Jeff Shek on the same day in that thread.&lt;br /&gt;
** [http://video.google.com/videoplay?docid=-6612645502883459334# video tutorial] for using Excel2GIFTv2.xls &lt;br /&gt;
**An earlier version of this Excel spreadsheet for generating multiple choice GIFT files [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=45245 initially created by Olga Forlani and improved by A. T. Wyatt].&lt;br /&gt;
*There are Open Office templates for generating GIFT files in Writer.  These are located in the Quiz forum in the[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=20705&amp;amp;parent=168385 OOo template to write exams and convert to GIFT format thread].&lt;br /&gt;
**The most recent for OO 2.x is &amp;quot;OOo2GIFT_Template_05.zip&amp;quot; postes 17 December 2005 by Enrique Castro.&lt;br /&gt;
**An earlier version is &amp;quot;GIFT_template_OOo.zip&amp;quot; posted 22 March 2005 by Enrique Castro.&lt;br /&gt;
*There is an easy to use on line multiple question generator at [http://a4esl.org/c/qw.html  a4esl.org]. Here you write your question(s) without formating marks, select Moodle and press the generate quiz button.  This creates GIFT formatted text that can be pasted into a file for importing into Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
**The initial format requires fewer keystrokes (it uses line position and returns) than the GIFT format, so you should save time and be less likely to create invalid data.&lt;br /&gt;
** Quiz authoring template for Microsoft Word [http://moodle.org/mod/data/view.php?d=13&amp;amp;rid=578 link]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Here is a 2-column PDF [http://buypct.com/gift_reference.pdf GIFT Reference Sheet]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Export questions]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Import questions]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Import and export FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Aiken Format]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Moodle XML format]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==External links==&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.heroku.com Moodle XML Converter] Like GIFT format but more human-readable. &lt;br /&gt;
*[http://www.kingsley.k12.mi.us/documents/gift_format.pdf Formatting quizzes in GIFT format]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://en.wikiversity.org/wiki/Google_Summer_of_Code_2010_Proposal:_GIFT_Conversion Google Summer of Code 2010 Proposal: GIFT Conversion]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Questions]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:GIFT]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Format GIFT]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:GIFTフォーマット]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tjuly</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=GIFT_format&amp;diff=73504</id>
		<title>GIFT format</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=GIFT_format&amp;diff=73504"/>
		<updated>2010-07-02T07:35:27Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tjuly: /* Word processors and Spreadsheets tools that create GIFTs */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;GIFT format allows someone to use a text editor to write multiple-choice, true-false, short answer, matching missing word and numerical questions in a simple format that can be imported. The GIFT format is also an export file format available in Question bank. The format has been developed within the Moodle Community but other software may support it to a greater or lesser degree.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*When creating a large numbers of questions, GIFT can provide a quick way of bulk loading questions either into a [[Question bank|question category]], or into a [[Adding_a_question_page#Importing_questions|Lesson]]. &lt;br /&gt;
*Sometimes it is easier proofing questions in a question category by viewing them in a GIFT file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== General instructions ==&lt;br /&gt;
At least one blank line must be left between each question. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the simple form, the question comes first, then the answers are set in between brackets, with an equal sign indicating the correct answer(s) and tilde the wrong answers.  A Number sign will insert a response.  Questions can be weighted by placing percentage signs around the weight.  Comments are preceded by double slashes and are not imported.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here are some useful [http://moodle.org/file.php/5/moddata/forum/121/236161/GIFT-examples.zip GIFT examples] than can be imported or used as rough template.  Many of the examples below used the questions in the file as a starting point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== UTF-8 encoding ===&lt;br /&gt;
Any GIFT file &#039;&#039;&#039;must&#039;&#039;&#039; be correctly encoded in [[UTF8]]. You can use Microsoft&#039;s text editor Notepad which comes with Windows to save your file in UTF-8. &#039;&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039;&#039;: ANSI format will (only) work for languages without any special characters (like ä, ö, ü, æ, å, ø, œ or ß). And don&#039;t use &amp;quot;Unicode&amp;quot; as format as this is actually UTF-16 and won&#039;t work. See [[Converting files to UTF-8]] for further information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Format symbols===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here are some common GIFT symbols and their use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
! Symbols !! Use&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| // text || Comment until end of line (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ::title:: || Question title (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| text || Question text (becomes title if no title specified)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| { || Start answer(s) -- without any answers, text is a description of following questions&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| {T} or {F} || True or False answer; also {TRUE} and {FALSE}&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| { ... =right ... } || Correct answer for multiple choice, (multiple answer? -- see page comments) or fill-in-the-blank&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| { ... ~wrong ... } || Incorrect answer for multiple choice or multiple answer&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| { ... =item -&amp;gt; match ... } || Answer for matching questions&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| #feedback text || Answer feedback for preceding multiple, fill-in-the-blank, or numeric answers&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| {# || Start numeric answer(s)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| answer:tolerance || Numeric answer accepted within ± tolerance range&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| low..high || Lower and upper range values of accepted numeric answer &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| =%n%answer:tolerance || n percent credit for one of multiple numeric ranges within tolerance from answer&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| } || End answer(s)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| \character || Backslash escapes the special meaning of ~, =, #, {, }, and :&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| \n || Places a newline in question text -- blank lines delimit questions&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here are some quick examples:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // true/false&lt;br /&gt;
 ::Q1:: 1+1=2 {T}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 // multiple choice with specified feedback for right and wrong answers&lt;br /&gt;
 ::Q2:: What&#039;s between orange and green in the spectrum? &lt;br /&gt;
 { =yellow # right; good! ~red # wrong, it&#039;s yellow ~blue # wrong, it&#039;s yellow }&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 // fill-in-the-blank&lt;br /&gt;
 ::Q3:: Two plus {=two =2} equals four.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 // matching&lt;br /&gt;
 ::Q4:: Which animal eats which food? { =cat -&amp;gt; cat food =dog -&amp;gt; dog food }&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 // math range question&lt;br /&gt;
 ::Q5:: What is a number from 1 to 5? {#3:2}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 // math range specified with interval end points&lt;br /&gt;
 ::Q6:: What is a number from 1 to 5? {#1..5}&lt;br /&gt;
 // translated on import to the same as Q5, but unavailable from Moodle question interface&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 // multiple numeric answers with partial credit and feedback&lt;br /&gt;
 ::Q7:: When was Ulysses S. Grant born? {#&lt;br /&gt;
          =1822:0      # Correct! Full credit.&lt;br /&gt;
          =%50%1822:2  # He was born in 1822. Half credit for being close.&lt;br /&gt;
 }&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 // essay&lt;br /&gt;
 ::Q8:: How are you? {}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Format symbols explained===&lt;br /&gt;
The multiple choice format below as a comment line // for the question, when Moodle exports it the question unique id number will appear here.  The first set of  :: precedes the question title. The second :: precedes the actual question. The first { indicates the start of the answers.  The correct answer is preceded by an = sign and wrong answers by a ~.  Teacher responses have a # in front of them.  The question ends with a } and then a blank line. NOTE it is { } not ( ) parenthesis! Usually these are gotten with help of the [AltGr] key.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 //Comment line &lt;br /&gt;
 ::Question title &lt;br /&gt;
 :: Question {&lt;br /&gt;
 =A correct answer&lt;br /&gt;
 ~Wrong answer1&lt;br /&gt;
 #A response to wrong answer1&lt;br /&gt;
 ~Wrong answer2&lt;br /&gt;
 #A response to wrong answer2&lt;br /&gt;
 ~Wrong answer3&lt;br /&gt;
 #A response to wrong answer3&lt;br /&gt;
 ~Wrong answer4&lt;br /&gt;
 #A response to wrong answer4&lt;br /&gt;
 }&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The shortest format for a multiple choice question is:&lt;br /&gt;
 Question{= A Correct Answer ~Wrong answer1 ~Wrong answer2 ~Wrong answer3 ~Wrong answer4 }&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;Tip:&#039;&#039; If you don&#039;t specify a question title the WHOLE question will be used as the title at the time of import into Moodle. There are pros and cons to allowing this to happen. Cons: This can add a lot of unnecessary words. This can include characters which might confuse the export GIFT process.  Pros: On the other hand. if the start of each question is different, it can make finding a single question easier in a category list of questions. It will save you typing.  Having the same title for every question is a very bad idea.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Question format examples==&lt;br /&gt;
There are several ways to use a text editor to write a GIFT format.  We will try to show the simple version for example and in some formats we will introduce some more complex features that can be imported into many Moodle Question formats.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Multiple choice===&lt;br /&gt;
For multiple choice questions, wrong answers are prefixed with a tilde (~) and the correct answer is prefixed with an equal sign (=).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is a simple acceptable GIFT multiple choice format:&lt;br /&gt;
 Who&#039;s buried in Grant&#039;s tomb?{=Grant ~no one ~Napoleon ~Churchill ~Mother Teresa }&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is a longer format that uses most of the GIFT elements:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  // question: 1 name: Grants tomb&lt;br /&gt;
 ::Grants tomb::Who is buried in Grant&#039;s tomb in New York City? {&lt;br /&gt;
 =Grant&lt;br /&gt;
 ~No one&lt;br /&gt;
 #Was true for 12 years, but Grant&#039;s remains were buried in the tomb in 1897&lt;br /&gt;
 ~Napoleon&lt;br /&gt;
 #He was buried in France&lt;br /&gt;
 ~Churchill&lt;br /&gt;
 #He was buried in England&lt;br /&gt;
 ~Mother Teresa&lt;br /&gt;
 #She was buried in India&lt;br /&gt;
 }&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===True-false===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this question-type the answer indicates whether the statement is true or false. The answer should be written as {TRUE} or {FALSE}, or abbreviated to {T} or {F}.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // question: 0 name: TrueStatement using {T} style&lt;br /&gt;
 ::TrueStatement about Grant::Grant was buried in a tomb in New York City.{T}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 // question: 0 name: FalseStatement using {FALSE} style&lt;br /&gt;
 ::FalseStatement about sun::The sun rises in the West.{FALSE}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Short answer===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Answers in Short Answer question-type are all prefixed by an equal sign (=), indicating that they are all correct answers. The answers must not contain a tilde.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here are two examples using the simple method showing possible right answers for credit.&lt;br /&gt;
 Who&#039;s buried in Grant&#039;s tomb?{=Grant =Ulysses S. Grant =Ulysses Grant}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Two plus two equals {=four =4}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If there is only one correct Short Answer, it may be written without the equal sign prefix, as long as it cannot be confused as True-False.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Matching===&lt;br /&gt;
Matching pairs begin with an equal sign (=) and are separated by this symbol &amp;quot;-&amp;gt;&amp;quot;. There must be at least three matching pairs.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 Match the following countries with their corresponding capitals. {&lt;br /&gt;
    =Canada -&amp;gt; Ottawa&lt;br /&gt;
    =Italy  -&amp;gt; Rome&lt;br /&gt;
    =Japan  -&amp;gt; Tokyo&lt;br /&gt;
    =India  -&amp;gt; New Delhi&lt;br /&gt;
    }&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Matching questions do not support feedback or percentage answer weights.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Missing word===&lt;br /&gt;
The Missing Word format automatically inserts a fill-in-the-blank line (like this _____) in the middle of the sentence. To use the Missing Word format, place the answers where you want the line to appear in the sentence.&lt;br /&gt;
 Moodle costd{~lots of money =nothing ~a small amount} to download from moodle.org.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the answers come before the closing punctuation mark, a fill-in-the-blank line will be inserted for the &amp;quot;missing word&amp;quot; format. All question types can be written in the Missing Word format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There must be a blank line (double carriage return) separating questions. For clarity, the answers can be written on separate lines and even indented. Some examples:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Mahatma Gandhi birthday is an Indian holiday on  {&lt;br /&gt;
 ~15th&lt;br /&gt;
 ~3rd&lt;br /&gt;
 =2nd&lt;br /&gt;
 } of October.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 Since {&lt;br /&gt;
   ~495 AD&lt;br /&gt;
   =1066 AD&lt;br /&gt;
   ~1215 AD&lt;br /&gt;
   ~ 43 AD&lt;br /&gt;
 }&lt;br /&gt;
 the town of Hastings England has been &amp;quot;famous with visitors&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Numerical questions===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The answer section for Numerical questions must start with a number sign (#). Numerical answers can include an error margin, which is written following the correct answer, separated by a colon. So for example, if the correct answer is anything between 1.5 and 2.5, then it would be written as follows {#2:0.5}. This indicates that 2 with an error margin of 0.5 is correct (i.e., the span from 1.5 to 2.5). If no error margin is specified, it will be assumed to be zero.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is a simple numerical format question. It will accept a range of 5 years.&lt;br /&gt;
 When was Ulysses S. Grant born?{#1822:5}&lt;br /&gt;
It is a good idea to check the margins of the range, 3.141 is not counted as correct and 3.142 is considered in the range. &lt;br /&gt;
 What is the value of pi (to 3 decimal places)? {#3.14159:0.0005}.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Optionally, numerical answers can be written as a span in the following format {#MinimumValue..MaximumValue}.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 What is the value of pi (to 3 decimal places)? {#3.141..3.142}.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle&#039;s browser interface does not support multiple numerical answers, but Moodle&#039;s code can and so does GIFT. This can be used to specify numerical multiple spans, and can be particularly usefully when combined with percentage weight grades. If multiple answers are used, they must be separated by an equal sign, like short answer questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 When was Ulysses S. Grant born? {#&lt;br /&gt;
    =1822:0&lt;br /&gt;
    =%50%1822:2&lt;br /&gt;
 }&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that since Moodle&#039;s browser GUI doesn&#039;t support multiple answers for Numerical questions, there&#039;s no way to see them or edit them through Moodle. The only way to change a numerical answer beyond the first, is to delete the question and re-import it (or use something like phpMyAdmin).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Essay===&lt;br /&gt;
An essay question is simply a question with an empty answer field. Nothing is permitted between the curly braces at all.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Write a short biography of Dag Hammarskjöld. {}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Description===&lt;br /&gt;
A description &amp;quot;question&amp;quot; has no answer part at all&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 You can use your pencil and paper for these next math questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Options==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition to these basic question types, this filter offers the following options: line comments, question name, feedback and percentage answer weight.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Line Comments===&lt;br /&gt;
Comments that will not be imported into Moodle can be included in the text file. This can be used to provide headers or more information about questions. All lines that start with a double backslash (not counting tabs or spaces) will be ignored by the filter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Subheading: Numerical questions below&lt;br /&gt;
 What&#039;s 2 plus 2? {#4}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Comments will be exported from Moodle and will include the unique question id.  The above question after it was imported and then exported from Moodle:&lt;br /&gt;
 // question: 914  name: What&#039;s 2 plus 2? &lt;br /&gt;
 ::What&#039;s 2 plus 2?::What&#039;s 2 plus 2?{#&lt;br /&gt;
     =4:0#&lt;br /&gt;
 }&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Question Name===&lt;br /&gt;
A question name can be specified by placing it first and enclosing it within double colons.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 ::Kanji Origins::Japanese characters originally&lt;br /&gt;
 came from what country? {=China}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 ::Thanksgiving Date::The American holiday of Thanksgiving is &lt;br /&gt;
 celebrated on the {~second ~third =fourth} Thursday of November.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If no question name is specified, the entire question will be used as the name by default.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Feedback===&lt;br /&gt;
Feedback can be included for each answer by following the answer with a number sign (# also known as a hash mark) and the feedback.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 What&#039;s the answer to this multiple-choice question? {&lt;br /&gt;
   ~wrong answer#feedback comment on the wrong answer&lt;br /&gt;
   ~another wrong answer#feedback comment on this wrong answer&lt;br /&gt;
   =right answer#Very good!&lt;br /&gt;
 }&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
 //From The Hitchhiker&#039;s Guide to the Galaxy&lt;br /&gt;
 Deep Thought said &amp;quot; {&lt;br /&gt;
   =forty two#Correct according to The Hitchhiker&#039;s Guide to the Galaxy!&lt;br /&gt;
   =42#Correct, as told to Loonquawl and Phouchg&lt;br /&gt;
   =forty-two#Correct!&lt;br /&gt;
 }  is the Ultimate Answer to the Ultimate Question of Life, The Universe, and Everything.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
    42 is the Absolute Answer to everything.{&lt;br /&gt;
 FALSE#42is the Ultimate Answer.#You gave the right answer.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For Multiple Choice questions, feedback is displayed only for the answer the student selected. For short answer, feedback is shown only when students input the corresponding correct answer. For true-false questions, there can be one or two feedback strings. The first is shown if the student gives the wrong answer. The second if the student gives the right answer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Percentage Answer Weights===&lt;br /&gt;
Percentage answer weights are available for both Multiple Choice and Short Answer questions. Percentage answer weights can be included by following the tilde (for Multiple Choice) or equal sign (for Short Answer) with the desired percent enclosed within percent signs (e.g., %50%). This option can be combined with feedback comments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Difficult question.{~wrong answer ~%50%half credit answer =full credit answer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 ::Jesus&#039; hometown::Jesus Christ was from {&lt;br /&gt;
    ~Jerusalem#This was an important city, but the wrong answer.&lt;br /&gt;
    ~%25%Bethlehem#He was born here, but not raised here.&lt;br /&gt;
    ~%50%Galilee#You need to be more specific.&lt;br /&gt;
    =Nazareth#Yes! That&#039;s right!&lt;br /&gt;
 }.&lt;br /&gt;
     &lt;br /&gt;
 ::Jesus&#039; hometown:: Jesus Christ was from {&lt;br /&gt;
    =Nazareth#Yes! That&#039;s right!&lt;br /&gt;
    =%75%Nazereth#Right, but misspelled.&lt;br /&gt;
    =%25%Bethlehem#He was born here, but not raised here.&lt;br /&gt;
 }&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that the last two examples are essentially the same question, first as multiple choice and then as short answer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that it is possible to specify percentage answer weights that are NOT available through the browser interface. The Match Grades drop-down on the import page determines how these are handled. You can either request that an error be reported or that the answer weight be adjusted to the nearest valid answer weight.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specify text-formatting for the question&lt;br /&gt;
The question text (only) may have an optional text format specified. Currently the available formats are moodle (Moodle Auto-Format), html (HTML format), plain (Plain text format) and markdown (Markdown format). The format is specified in square brackets immediately before the question text. See [[Formatting text]] for further information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 [markdown]The *American holiday of Thanksgiving* is celebrated on the {&lt;br /&gt;
    ~second&lt;br /&gt;
    ~third&lt;br /&gt;
    =fourth&lt;br /&gt;
 } Thursday of November.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Multiple Answers===&lt;br /&gt;
The Multiple Answers option is used for multiple choice questions when two or more answers must be selected in order to obtain full credit. The multiple answers option is enabled by assigning partial answer weight to multiple answers, while allowing no single answer to receive full credit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 What two people are entombed in Grant&#039;s tomb? {&lt;br /&gt;
    ~No one&lt;br /&gt;
    ~%50%Grant&lt;br /&gt;
    ~%50%Grant&#039;s wife&lt;br /&gt;
    ~Grant&#039;s father&lt;br /&gt;
 }&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that there is no equal sign (=) in any answer and the answers should total no more than 100%, otherwise Moodle will return an error. To avoid the problem of students automatically getting 100% by simply checking all of the answers, it is best to include negative answer weights for wrong answers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 What two people are entombed in Grant&#039;s tomb? {&lt;br /&gt;
    ~%-50%No one&lt;br /&gt;
    ~%50%Grant&lt;br /&gt;
    ~%50%Grant&#039;s wife&lt;br /&gt;
    ~%-50%Grant&#039;s father&lt;br /&gt;
 }&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Special Characters ~ = # { }===&lt;br /&gt;
These symbols ~ = # { } : control the operation of this filter and cannot be used as normal text within questions. Since these symbols have a special role in determining the operation of this filter, they are called &amp;quot;control characters.&amp;quot; But sometimes you may want to use one of these characters, for example to show a mathematical formula in a question. The way to get around this problem is &amp;quot;escaping&amp;quot; the control characters. This means simply putting a backslash (\) before a control character so the filter will know that you want to use it as a literal character instead of as a control character. For example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Which answer equals 5? {&lt;br /&gt;
    ~ \= 2 + 2&lt;br /&gt;
    = \= 2 + 3&lt;br /&gt;
    ~ \= 2 + 4&lt;br /&gt;
 }&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 ::GIFT Control Characters::&lt;br /&gt;
 Which of the following is NOT a control character for the GIFT import format? {&lt;br /&gt;
   ~ \~     # \~ is a control character.&lt;br /&gt;
   ~ \=     # \= is a control character.&lt;br /&gt;
   ~ \#     # \# is a control character.&lt;br /&gt;
   ~ \{     # \{ is a control character.&lt;br /&gt;
   ~ \}     # \} is a control character.&lt;br /&gt;
   = \      # Correct! \ (backslash) is not a control character. BUT,&lt;br /&gt;
              it is used to escape the control characters.&lt;br /&gt;
 }&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the question is processed, the backslash is removed and is not saved in Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Specifying Categories===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to change the category into which the questions are added within the GIFT file. You can change the category as many times as you wish within the file. All questions after the modifier up to the next modifier or the end of the file will be added to the specified category. Up to the first category modifier the category specified on the import screen will be used. Note that for this to work the from file: box must be ticked on the import screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To include a category modifier include a line like this (with a blank line before and after):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 $CATEGORY: tom/dick/harry&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
or simply&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 $CATEGORY: mycategory&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
...the first example specifies a path of nested categories. In this cae the questions will go into harry. The categories are created if they do not exist.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Making questions case sensitive===&lt;br /&gt;
Short Answer questions can be made case sensitive by changing &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; to &amp;quot;1&amp;quot; in the following line:&lt;br /&gt;
 $question-&amp;gt;usecase = 0; // Ignore case&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Hints and Tips==&lt;br /&gt;
* Use the ::title:: at the beginning of every question to organize your questions when Moodle presents a list or exports them as another GIFT file.  When the title is left blank, Moodle will put the beginning of the question as the title. Some teachers want to see something like &amp;quot;001 LIT101 Poe ref Purloin Letter&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;The Purloin Letter was written by (AmLit pg 254)&amp;quot; in the title.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* You can specify markup if you need to format the question by setting [html], [moodle], [plain] or [markdown] just before the question text. See more about this in the reference pdf below.&lt;br /&gt;
* In the Lesson module, in a question page, correct answers jump by default to Next page and incorrect answers jump to This page (i.e. student has to &amp;quot;try again&amp;quot;). When importing from a GIFT format file, this is exactly the mechanism which is used.&lt;br /&gt;
* If you want a student to be taken directly from one question to the next irrespective of their answer being correct or incorrect: in the Lesson Settings, set Maximum number of attempts: to 1. &lt;br /&gt;
**Please note, however, that a message &amp;quot;correct / incorrect&amp;quot; will still be displayed to the student upon answering each question. If you do not want this (default) feedback message to be displayed then enter your own feedback message (i.e. &amp;quot;continue&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;---&amp;quot;, etc.) &lt;br /&gt;
**In case you want no visible message displayed then enter a non-breaking space as feedback. Moodle will not put it&#039;s automatic response because it sees the blank space. To do this, put a # after the answer and write [[Image:Nbsp.png]] (without spaces between these characters). &lt;br /&gt;
* Need to use a special GIFT character in your question or answer?  Put a \ in front of the GIFT character.  &lt;br /&gt;
**For example if you want to use curly braces, { or }, or equal sign, =, or # or ~ in a GIFT file (in a math question including TeX expressions) you must &amp;quot;escape&amp;quot; them by preceding them with a \ directly in front of each { or } or =. It is possible to use a replace program/macro/editor filter to do this conversion before importing to Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
* Want to change T/F type questions to multiple choice? Consider exporting the T/F questions as a GIFT file, then using a text editor to replace the (T) with (=True ~False). Perhaps change the title slightly so you will recognize the new questions.&lt;br /&gt;
* Alphabetic case-sensitive comparison is disabled by default. If you need case-sensitive comparison for short answer questions (an unusual need), precede them with:&lt;br /&gt;
   $question-&amp;gt;usecase = 1;&lt;br /&gt;
surrounded by blank lines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Word processors and Spreadsheets tools that create GIFTs==&lt;br /&gt;
Several contributors have used macros to generate GIFT files from a more familiar popular programs.&lt;br /&gt;
* Similar to GIFT format but more human-readable - [http://moodle.heroku.com Moodle XML Converter]. Convert your questions online from existing textfiles. Examples are provided on site. &lt;br /&gt;
* There are Word macros available for easily creating GIFT files. See [http://www.moodleschool.co.nz/mod/resource/view.php?id=83 Moodle4Teachers] for downloads and instructions for use.&lt;br /&gt;
* There are several Excel spreadsheets for generating GIFT files. Several people have built upon other contributors work.  &lt;br /&gt;
**The latest version was posted on 10 April 2007 and can be found in this thread with this file name: [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=66660 Excel2GIFTv1.1.zip by Timothy Takemoto].  There is also a set of instructions Excel2GIFTv1.1_Instructions.rtf by Jeff Shek on the same day in that thread.&lt;br /&gt;
** [http://video.google.com/videoplay?docid=-6612645502883459334# video tutorial] for using Excel2GIFTv2.xls &lt;br /&gt;
**An earlier version of this Excel spreadsheet for generating multiple choice GIFT files [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=45245 initially created by Olga Forlani and improved by A. T. Wyatt].&lt;br /&gt;
*There are Open Office templates for generating GIFT files in Writer.  These are located in the Quiz forum in the[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=20705&amp;amp;parent=168385 OOo template to write exams and convert to GIFT format thread].&lt;br /&gt;
**The most recent for OO 2.x is &amp;quot;OOo2GIFT_Template_05.zip&amp;quot; postes 17 December 2005 by Enrique Castro.&lt;br /&gt;
**An earlier version is &amp;quot;GIFT_template_OOo.zip&amp;quot; posted 22 March 2005 by Enrique Castro.&lt;br /&gt;
*There is an easy to use on line multiple question generator at [http://a4esl.org/c/qw.html  a4esl.org]. Here you write your question(s) without formating marks, select Moodle and press the generate quiz button.  This creates GIFT formatted text that can be pasted into a file for importing into Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
**The initial format requires fewer keystrokes (it uses line position and returns) than the GIFT format, so you should save time and be less likely to create invalid data.&lt;br /&gt;
** Quiz authoring template for Microsoft Word [http://moodle.org/mod/data/view.php?d=13&amp;amp;rid=578 link]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Here is a 2-column PDF [http://buypct.com/gift_reference.pdf GIFT Reference Sheet]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Export questions]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Import questions]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Import and export FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Aiken Format]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Moodle XML format]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==External links==&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://www.kingsley.k12.mi.us/documents/gift_format.pdf Formatting quizzes in GIFT format]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://en.wikiversity.org/wiki/Google_Summer_of_Code_2010_Proposal:_GIFT_Conversion Google Summer of Code 2010 Proposal: GIFT Conversion]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Questions]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:GIFT]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Format GIFT]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:GIFTフォーマット]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tjuly</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Lesson_activity&amp;diff=73318</id>
		<title>Lesson activity</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Lesson_activity&amp;diff=73318"/>
		<updated>2010-06-25T05:59:43Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tjuly: /* See also */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Lessons}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Lesson icon.gif]] The lesson module presents a series of HTML pages to the student, who is usually asked to make some sort of choice underneath the content area. The choice will send them to a specific page in the Lesson. In a Lesson page&#039;s simplest form, the student can select a continue button at the bottom of the page, which will send them to the next page in the Lesson. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 2 basic Lesson page types that the student will see: question pages and branch table pages.  There are also several advanced navigational pages which can meet more specialized needs of the Teacher. The Lesson module was designed to be adaptive and to use a student&#039;s choices to create a self directed lesson.   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*The significant difference between a Lesson and other activity tools available in Moodle comes from its adaptive ability. With this tool, each answer to a question may send the student to a different series of pages in the lesson. The teacher&#039;s response and the next page the student will see has already been thought out by the teacher. Thus Lesson can deliver content in interesting and flexible ways to each student, with no direct or time sensitive action required by the teacher once the lesson has been created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== General information about the lesson and its methodology ==&lt;br /&gt;
For a student, a lesson is a series of interactive pages that require a choice on their part before the next page appears.    &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The choice determines the way the lesson appears to the student. The lesson can be a series of pages presented in a linear fashion, like a slide show, or presented in a non-linear, branching manner, or a combination of the two. The teacher can use the Lesson settings to create a different student experience for each lesson.  There are also special navigation pages that the teacher may use to change the way parts of the lesson are viewed by students.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The student choice generally drives the lesson, which has been thought out by the teacher. For example, a particular answer might send the student back in the lesson for a review, while another answer will advance the student to a new page. Sometimes the student will only be given the choice to &amp;quot;continue&amp;quot;.  The lesson can be scored with the use of questions for a grade, or used simply as a resource of non-graded pages or a combination of both.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two basic modes: presentation and flash card.  Most of the descriptions of a lesson in this document are about the presentation mode and the use of questions and branch  pages.  The Flash Card section describes how to make lesson pages appear randomly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|Table of Contents]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Presentation Lesson ==&lt;br /&gt;
The Lesson activity uses the standard Moodle [[HTML editor]] tool to make any [[Page content|page&#039;s content]] interesting. This tool can assist the teacher with pictures, links, fonts, tables and other graphics to engage the student&#039;s attention.  Lesson also can keep students from straying from the lesson plan with various settings including password protection, various time limits and dependency on a previous lesson&#039;s activity. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Navigation pages are only seen by the teacher but will affect the order of the pages the student views. For example, a [[Clusters|cluster]] is a series of pages bracketed by a navigational pages called a &amp;quot;start cluster&amp;quot; and a &amp;quot;end of cluster&amp;quot; page.   Navigation pages are an advanced feature and are best added after the teacher has laid out their lesson with the pages that will be seen by the student.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Pages, questions, answers and responses===&lt;br /&gt;
A [[Lesson_Pages|lesson is made up of pages]]. For the teacher there are two basic types of Lesson pages: choice and navigation. The student sees choice pages called  [[Lesson_Pages#Branch_.28Branch_Table.29-_Choice_Pages|&amp;quot;Branch Tables&amp;quot;]] or [[Lesson_module#Types_of_questions_available_within_a_lesson|Question pages]]. Branch tables deliver content and can provide links to one or more other pages in the lesson. Each question page can do the same but also can give an individual response and an individual score for each choice (the student&#039;s answer).  The teacher decides upon the page type and how to best use its flexibility to achieve the educational goals of the specific Lesson or course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:For example, the default lesson question is a multiple choice page. The teacher might place content on the page and ask a question about it.  The teacher can provide 1 to 20 answers. In a simple use of the multiple choice question, the teacher might decided to send the student back to the question again after a student selects a wrong answer, but move a correct answer to the next page.  On some answers, the teacher may decide to provide some explanation before sending the student along.  Unlike a piece of paper, the answers are going to re arrange themselves every time the student enters the question page.   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Of course the teacher can decide a more complex approach in constructing Lesson or a page. Using our multiple choice example,the teacher may give each answer a different score.  And/or depending upon the answer, send the student to a different page for an appropriate review.   The teacher may decide that a specific Lesson is a series of pages filled with information and only one choice (the continue button) that always sends the student to the next page, perhaps saving the question pages for the end. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|Table of Contents]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Edit order and navigation order===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The order of the pages of a lesson is usually determined by the material or the personal style of the teacher. A page feature called [[Jumps|jumps]] determines what a student sees next.&lt;br /&gt;
Once a lesson contains two or more pages the teacher can move existing pages around and add different kinds of pages to any position within the lesson. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The teacher sees the pages in what is called the &#039;&#039;[[Edit page order (Lesson)|edit order]]&#039;&#039; when they edit a lesson.  The students see the lesson pages in the &#039;&#039;[[Navigation Page Order|navigation order]]&#039;&#039;, which can also be seen by the teacher in preview mode. Most of the time we will be talking about the edit order from the teacher&#039;s perspective, rather than navigation order of the student.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Jumps are the primary tool the teacher will use to determine a students navigation. For example, each different answer to a question, might send the student to a different page. There are two types of jumps, &#039;&#039;relative&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;absolute&#039;&#039;. The default jumps used by most pages are the &#039;&#039;relative&#039;&#039; jumps &amp;quot;Next Page&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;This Page&amp;quot;.  For example, the destination of the Next Page jump is always the next page in the edit order of the lesson. An &#039;&#039;absolute&#039;&#039; jump sends the student to a specific page (identified by the page title).  A pull down list of possible jumps assist the teacher in being creative. Thus jumps allow the teacher to design a lesson for the students with &amp;quot;branches&amp;quot;, loops and a non-linear structure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The teacher can see how a lesson&#039;s navigation &amp;quot;works&amp;quot; by using several preview tools.  For example there is a [[Viewing_a_lesson#When_the_lesson_already_has_content:|Preview tab]] for the teacher when they open a lesson and there is also a preview icon associated with each page.  It is possible for the Teacher to switch their role in the course to that of a student.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|Table of Contents]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Answers===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Typically each question within a lesson will have one correct [[Answers|answer]] and several wrong answers. For example, in a multiple choice question, each answer can receive an individual response from the teacher before sending the student (with a jump setting) to view the same or another page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As will be seen later, there are two ways to score an answer. In one method, the direction students are sent in the edit order of pages determines if the answer was correct or wrong for scoring purposes. Usually a correct answer advances the student in the edit order and wrong answers send the students back to the question page or back in the edit order. The other method uses custom scoring and an answer is given a score to calculate the grade. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a question page is added, the jumps have a default setting. The jump for the first answer is the Next Page and it is a good practice to keep this as a right answer. The jumps for the subsequent answers are set to Same Page. The score for the first answer is 1 and for the rest 0. These settings can be changed by editing the question. Remember the order of the answers is going to be random each time a student enters the question page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When Custom Scoring is turned On in the Lesson settings, then each answer has a point value associated with it. Usually a correct answer receives a score of 1 and a wrong answer receive a score 0. It is possible to give a negative score or partial credit (say 3 for the best answer and 1 for a marginal answer) in some question types.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|Table of Contents]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Grading===&lt;br /&gt;
A students answers to questions can be graded. The [[Lesson score|lesson scores]] and grades can be viewed on the [[Lesson reports|&amp;quot;Reports&amp;quot; tab]] in edit mode and become part of the [[Grades|gradebook]]. A relatively simple formula is used to [[Lesson score|score]] the lesson. It is the number of correct answers divided by the number of question pages seen. This number score can be use by the [[Scales|grade scale]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When [[Adding/editing_a_lesson#Custom_Scoring|Custom Scoring]] is selected in the Lesson settings, then the grading method changes.  With this option, the grade is based on earned points by the user, which is divided by the total points possible. When this option is turned on, the teacher can assign a score for each answer, this can be a negative or 0 (zero) or a positive number.  Usually the score is 0 for a wrong answer and 1 for a correct answer.  The point values associated with each of the user&#039;s answers are added up. That is then divided by the total of the maximum points that the user could have earned for each page answered. This number is then scaled by the grade parameter of the lesson.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The overall score is computed when the Lesson is completed by the student.   A completed lesson usually means the student has viewed every page, or answered every question or is directed by a jump to the &amp;quot;[[Lesson_Pages#End_of_Lesson_Page|end of lesson]]&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;TIP:&#039;&#039; Grading can be continued when student leaves the lesson for some reason before completing it. The student does not have to go through all of the lesson in one &amp;quot;[[Adding/editing_a_lesson#User_can_re-take|sitting]]&amp;quot;. For example, if a student goes through some pages and then breaks off, the next time they view the lesson they are asked whether they want to start at the beginning of the lesson or at the point where they left off. The latter point is actually the page they reached with their last correct answer. The previous &amp;quot;attempts&amp;quot; are recorded and the grade for &amp;quot;broken&amp;quot; sessions will include pages seen and questions answered in the previous viewings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*The main focus of a lesson should be the transfer of knowledge in a reasonably interesting way. Giving a grade may well turn the lesson into a kind of quiz where giving the correct answer is the sole goal instead of exploring different ways of thinking about an idea. On the other hand, students like to get a perfect &amp;quot;score&amp;quot; and giving grades may well be the carrot needed to get the student to repeat the lesson until they get the magic 100%.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Some instructors use Lessons as Formative Assignments where the grades, although some measure of activity, are not generally counted in the final mark for the course. If lessons are used in a formal way then it is probably best to use their grades in thresholds.  &lt;br /&gt;
*Many instructors use lessons to get across chunks of knowledge. The grading options enable instructors to utilize the [http://www.wcln.org/Flow_Documentation.htm#The_Practice_Principle &amp;quot;Practice Principle&amp;quot;] of eLearning, in which immediate practice in answering questions about content leads to improved retention and understanding of the material. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With that in mind, a lesson has a Retake option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Teacher review of students answers===&lt;br /&gt;
The teacher has several options to review students answers in a lesson.  The [[Lesson reports|report tab]] provides both an overview of each student&#039;s attempt of a lesson, and a detailed summary of the class&#039;s answers to each question. It is also possible to see the same report via [[Grades|gradebook]] in the course administration block.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Student Review===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enabling student review will override custom feedback for questions. [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=70798 Forum discussion]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|Table of Contents]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Re-takes===  &lt;br /&gt;
Allowing a student to re take a lesson is the default lesson setting under [[Adding/editing_a_lesson#User_can_re-take|grade options]]. Each attempt at a lesson is normally recorded and the student can see a record of their performance by viewing their [[Student_tutorials#Settings|activity page]]. The teacher when creating a lesson has the option of showing the &amp;quot;final&amp;quot; grade as either the mean of all the attempts or the best (maximum score) of their attempts. This &amp;quot;final&amp;quot; grade is the one shown on the [[Grades]] page and the &amp;quot;Lessons&amp;quot; page. By default the mean of the grades is used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In some learning environments, the teacher may not wish the students to have more than one attempt at a lesson. A particular lesson may be being used in an exam-like situation. Here the Lesson parameter for re-take is set to &amp;quot;No. Once completed the lesson will then not allow students to re-take the lesson. If, however, the lesson is not completed in one &amp;quot;sitting&amp;quot;, students are still allowed to restart the lesson at the beginning or at the point where they left off.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*As mentioned earlier a lesson can be used as a formative assignment, imparting some knowledge while at the same time making some demands on the students. It seems natural that students should be allowed to re-visit lessons and because they are given a grade many will want to achieve a good grade. This promotes re-takes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Remember that even if a student has achieved the maximum possible grade in a lesson, allowing them to revisit the lesson to explore the various &amp;quot;wrong&amp;quot; paths in the lesson, may provide the student, you and your class additional insights.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|Table of Contents]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Building lessons===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When creating a lesson the teacher must put some content using the [[HTML editor]] tool into the first page. Once the first page is in place the teacher has the option of adding more pages in front or after that page.  Once a question or branch page have been created, the pages can be edited by the teacher at any time.  When the lesson contains more than one page the teacher also has the option of moving pages, that is, changing the order of the pages. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*A lesson will normally cover a limited amount of material. A topic or week might contain many lessons. Lessons are shown to the student in the home page for the course within &amp;quot;weeks&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;topics&amp;quot;, and/or in the activity block when it is part of the course home page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*As with any lesson, it is a good idea to have a plan before starting the presentation.   Simple lessons that basically go from the start to the end in a straight line path, one page after the other, can be created from an outline. More complicated lessons require more planning.  The good news is that a teacher can create a simple lesson and then based upon feedback and performance,  can add refinements or complexity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Adding_a_question_page]]- more help on adding question pages &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Adding_a_branch_table]] - more help on adding branch pages&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|Table of Contents]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Types of questions available within a lesson ==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Moodle 1.6}} [[Image:Question_type_tabs.GIF]]  &lt;br /&gt;
===Multiple choice ===&lt;br /&gt;
In a multiple choice question, the student is given a question and a list of answers.  In a Lesson, the answer list will be shuffled every time the question is view by a student. In a multiple choice question, the student selects one answer.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Questions can use pictures.   Indeed, pictures can be used as answers when the [[HTML editor]] is turned on and the page reloaded.   Each answer in a multichoice question can be scored separately.  It is possible to give a negative score for an answer, or partial credit for a wrong answer. The teacher can give a response based upon the answer selected by the student. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====With multianswer box checked====&lt;br /&gt;
A check in the multianswer box allows the teacher to determine that more than 1 answer is required for the student to receive credit for the question. There is no partial credit and the student must select just correct answers from a list. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An example of a multianswer question is:&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;Which of the following are animals&#039;&#039;&#039;?&lt;br /&gt;
::- A dog&lt;br /&gt;
::- A cow&lt;br /&gt;
::- A rock&lt;br /&gt;
::- A rose&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To ensure the multianswer feature works, all correct answers should be in first lines of the answer list, receive the same score (let say 1), response and jump to the same page. Then wrong answers should hve the same score (usually 0), response and all jump to the same page. In other words you should have two groups of answers (correct answers first and then incorrect ones) with the identical scores, responses and jumps for each group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A student who does not select all the correct answers, or includes any wrong answer will receive the &amp;quot;wrong answer&amp;quot; score, response and jump.   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See also [[Multiple_Choice_question_type]] which is a quiz question and works differently.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Short answer===&lt;br /&gt;
In a short answer question the student is expected to answer with one word or a few words. [[Short-Answer question type]] gives more information about this kind of question &lt;br /&gt;
{{Moodle 1.6}}&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with Moodle 1.6, there are two different &#039;&#039;student answer&#039;&#039; analysis systems available for the Short Answer type of question in the Lesson Module: the &#039;&#039;&#039;simple system &#039;&#039;&#039; and the  new  &#039;&#039;&#039;regular expressions system&#039;&#039;&#039;.  The simple system is the default and is the same used by the Quiz Module.  There is a &amp;quot;Use Regular Expressions&amp;quot; option box on the Edit Question Page screen in the Lesson Module.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We suggest first reading about the  [[Short-Answer question type|Short answer question page]] with the examples of the &amp;quot;simple analysis&amp;quot;, and then read the [[Short answer analysis]] page that gives more information about &amp;quot;Regular Expression analysis&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|Table of Contents]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===True / false===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The True/False question type is a special case of the multiple choice question. The student is prompted to choose which is the correct option. See [[Lesson_module#Multiple_choice|multiple choice question]] above for details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Matching questions===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Question Matching pulldown 1.JPG||thumb|80px|right|Matching]]&lt;br /&gt;
Matching questions consist of a list of names or statements, or pictures which must be correctly matched against another list. For example &amp;quot;Match the letter with its position in the alphabet.   One list would have A, B, C, D, Z and the other in a pull down menu next to each item would have 2, 4, 3, 1, 26 .   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Unlike the &#039;&#039;Multichoice question&#039;&#039; where the choices are shown in a random order, the first list of items in a &#039;&#039;Matching question&#039;&#039; is not shuffled but shown in the same order as entered. The second list is scrambled.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In 1.9 there is one score, one response and one jump associated with the right answers (where all matches are correct) and one score, one response and one jump associated with a wrong match (where one or more are not matched correctly).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Matching question type]] for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Numerical Question===&lt;br /&gt;
This type of question requires a number as the answer. In it&#039;s simplest form it requires just one answer to be specified. For example &amp;quot;What is 2 plus 2?&amp;quot;, where 4 is the correct answer. A numerical question will also accept a number in a range as being correct.  The answers are similar to short answer, where the order that the teacher lists the answers is important.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Numerical question type]] for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The lesson numerical question differs from the numerical quiz question and the numerical embedded question (Cloze), in a couple of ways when it evaluates answers. For example there is no wild card.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|Table of Contents]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Essay Questions===&lt;br /&gt;
Short essay questions were introduced in Moodle version 1.5. These are meant for short, paragraph or two type of essays one often finds on exams. Thus we did not use the html editor, preferring a simple text field. For longer essays, the assignment module is a better choice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The student simply enters their essay in the box provided. The teacher sees ungraded essay questions when opening the lesson.  After grading, the teacher can email their responses to the student.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Essay question type]] page has more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|Table of Contents]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Branches and branch tables ==&lt;br /&gt;
If your lesson delivers quite a lot of information, you can divide it into sections that are called [[Lesson_Pages#Branch_.28Branch_Table.29-_Choice_Pages|branches]] in Moodle. One way of moving between these branches is by [[Adding_a_branch_table |adding a Branch Table page]].  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Branch tables are simply pages which have a set of links/jumps to other pages in the lesson.  The student sees labeled buttons under the page content to provide their choices. Branch tables are similar to a multiple choice question format.  They have a title, [[Page content|content]] section, student choices (called descriptions) and [[Jumps|jumps]]. There is no score for a student&#039;s choice, so branch tables are grade neutral.  Branch tables also can be put to special uses by a teacher.  To help understand these concepts we are going to call one use a &amp;quot;ordered branch&amp;quot; and the other a &amp;quot;classic branch&amp;quot;.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Ordered branches===&lt;br /&gt;
A table of contents is an example of a use of ordered branches. Typically a lesson may start with a [[Lesson_Pages#Branch_.28Branch_Table.29-_Choice_Pages|branch table]] with the title &amp;quot;Table of Contents&amp;quot;.  The student selects a Description button and jumps to a page in the edit order that starts a series of pages about that subject.  At the end of an ordered branch, the student is given several options by a question or branch page, such as: &amp;quot;Go to the next page&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Start of the series again&amp;quot;,  &amp;quot;End the lesson&amp;quot;, or &amp;quot;Return to the Table of Contents. [[Image:Lesson visual order graphic1.png|thumb|100px|center|TOC that leads to 3 ordered branches]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Classic branches===&lt;br /&gt;
The classic branch is an advanced navigational feature.  It introduces random movement within a series of pages that the teacher determines.  A classic branch needs a Branch Table at the start of the series and a special navigation page called &amp;quot;End of Branch&amp;quot; at the end of the series.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default jump in an &amp;quot;End of Branch&amp;quot; page is the preceding branch table page as an absolute jump.  After a classic branch has been created, the teacher will see 3 new relative jump options: &amp;quot;Unseen question within a branch&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Random question within a branch&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Random branch page&amp;quot;.  The classic branch with its &amp;quot;end of branch&amp;quot; navigation page is similar to a [[Clusters|cluster]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;Tip:&#039;&#039; As with any advanced navigational feature, it is best to add it after the basic question and branch tables pages have been created.  Checking the Lesson&#039;s behavior in a student role is another best practice with highly adaptive lesson formats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Tips when using branches===&lt;br /&gt;
*The number of links shown when setting up or editing a branch table or a question is set by the lesson setting &amp;quot;[[Adding/editing_a_lesson#The_Maximum_Number_of_Answers_.2F_Branches_in_a_Lesson|Number of Answers/Branches]]&amp;quot;. This parameter can be changed on the fly by simply clicking on the &amp;quot;Update this Lesson&amp;quot; button at the top of the teacher&#039;s page and changing the value.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*When a lesson includes one or more ordered or classic branches, teachers need to decide if their students must visit every branch.  By adding a question or two in each branch, the teacher can set the &amp;quot;[[Adding/editing_a_lesson#The_Minimum_Number_of_Questions_in_a_Lesson|Minimum number of Questions]]&amp;quot; parameter to some reasonable number of questions that must be answered.  Without this parameter a student might visit a single branch in the lesson, answer all its questions correctly and leave the lesson with the maximum grade based upon their attempts, not the total number of available questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Remember that using branches may encourage a student to revisit a question page more than once.  This can impact scoring.  Since scores can not be displayed for a teacher, it is a good practice for a new Moodling Teacher to log in as a student to check how the score is kept in their Lesson.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Lesson_Pages#Branch_.28Branch_Table.29-_Choice_Pages|Choice pages gives]] detailed help about editing a branch . [[Adding_a_branch_table|Adding a branch table]] reviews process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|Table of Contents]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Flash card lesson ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Lesson module can be used as a type of Flash Card assignment by changing the [[Adding/editing_a_lesson|lesson settings]]. In this kind of lesson, the student is shown pages (cards) in random order.  Usually these are question pages. There is no set beginning and no set end. Just a series of cards shown one after another in no particular order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two very similar variants of Flash Card behavior. A Flow Control option, &amp;quot;After a correct answer&amp;quot; set to [[Adding/editing_a_lesson#Action_after_a_Correct_Answer |&amp;quot;Show an unseen page&amp;quot;]] never shows the same page twice (even if the student did not answer the question associated with the Card/Page correctly). The other option is &amp;quot;Show an unanswered page&amp;quot; which shows the student pages that may have appeared before but only if they answered the associated question wrongly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When using either of these Flash Card lessons the teacher can decide to use either all the Cards/Pages in the lesson or just a (random) sub-set. This is done through the [[Adding/editing_a_lesson#Number_of_Pages_.28Cards.29_to_Show|&amp;quot;Number of Pages (Cards) to show&amp;quot;]] parameter also found in the Flow Control settings. Make sure the number is less than the total number of available pages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When using the Flash Card mode of presentation, setting the jumps is important. A correct answer jump should point to the Next Page, a wrong answer should stay on the same page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Lesson Flash Card mode is very similar to a random ordered Quiz, the difference is that the questions are shown one page at a time. And, extra text can be included with each question in the Flash Card.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is also a [[Flashcard_module]] that can be added to a Moodle site.  It is also possible to create lesson segment that is a mini flashcard lesson with the use of special jumps and navigational pages called [[Clusters]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|Table of Contents]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Lesson dependencies and linking ==&lt;br /&gt;
===Dependency===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Adding/editing_a_lesson#Dependent_on|A dependency setting]] allows the current lesson to be dependent upon a student&#039;s performance in one specific lesson that is in the same course. If the conditions(s) is not met, then the student will not be able to access this lesson. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These dependent conditions include: time spent, completed or receive a better than grade one specific lesson.   Any  combination of the conditions can be used. Please note, a Lessson must include one question for the dependent &amp;quot;completed&amp;quot; condition to be met.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*A typical use of this feature is to &amp;quot;daisy chain&amp;quot; a series of Lessons to make sure the students take the lessons in order.   This might be useful in a training type of course which has no open or close dates because it can be started and finished at any time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Links to other places===&lt;br /&gt;
Using the [[Adding/editing_a_lesson#Link_to_activity|link to activity]] in the Lesson settings, will offer the student a direct link button to another activity in the course when they complete the lesson.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another handy Lesson setting [[Adding/editing_a_lesson#Pop-up_to_file_or_web_page|Pop-Up]], will create a window the student can view while in the lesson.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*More advanced Moodlers can figure out how to place HTML links on a lesson page. Thus it is possible to create a link to another lesson/activity, a lesson/activity in another course, or even to a specific page in a lesson.  While this method can be useful, the student may not be able to find their way back to the page with the link.   In general, the links can be created by copying the location of the desired link from the browser&#039;s address bar, then pasting it as a link.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|Table of Contents]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.heroku.com moodle.heroku.com] Moodle XML Converter to easily create set of quizzes with minimum effort. &lt;br /&gt;
*[[Lesson samples]] down loadable and on line demonstrations of the Lesson module.&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Using Moodle book]] Chapter 9: Lessons&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Grades]] See how individuals and the class answered the questions (must not be a practice lesson)&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=nq3das503-Q Creating a Decision-Making exercise (role play) using a Lesson]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=4xjXelUZguw Creating a Lesson video tutorial]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.tokem.fi moodle.tokem.fi] Go to teacher&#039;s manual and select lesson. For versions 1.5.4 and 1.6.4, a good supplement or alternative to MoodleDocs.  Very hands on for specific type of teacher.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Modules]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Lecciones]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[eu:Ikasgaiak]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Leçon]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Lektion]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tjuly</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Aiken_format&amp;diff=72978</id>
		<title>Aiken format</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Aiken_format&amp;diff=72978"/>
		<updated>2010-06-14T11:19:57Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tjuly: /* Hints and Tips */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;The Aiken format is a very simple way of creating multiple choice questions using a clear human-readable format. (The GIFT format has many more options and perhaps is less prone to errors, but doesn&#039;t look as straight-forward as AIKEN. ) The question must be all on one line.  Each answer must start with a single-letter character, followed by a period &#039;.&#039; or a bracket &#039;)&#039;, then a space.  The answer line must immediately follow, starting with &amp;quot;ANSWER: &amp;quot; (NOTE space after : !) and then giving the appropriate letter. Here is an example of the format:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NOTE: The answer letters (A,B,C etc.) and the word &amp;quot;ANSWER&amp;quot; &#039;&#039;&#039;must&#039;&#039;&#039; be capitalised as shown otherwise the import will fail. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;What is the correct answer to this question?&lt;br /&gt;
A. Is it this one?&lt;br /&gt;
B. Maybe this answer?&lt;br /&gt;
C. Possibly this one?&lt;br /&gt;
D. Must be this one!&lt;br /&gt;
ANSWER: D&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Which LMS has the most quiz import formats?&lt;br /&gt;
A) Moodle&lt;br /&gt;
B) ATutor&lt;br /&gt;
C) Claroline&lt;br /&gt;
D) Blackboard&lt;br /&gt;
E) WebCT&lt;br /&gt;
F) Ilias&lt;br /&gt;
ANSWER: A&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Both these examples imported into Moodle (1.9) gave questions looking like:&lt;br /&gt;
 Which LMS has the most quiz import formats?&lt;br /&gt;
 Choose one answer.&lt;br /&gt;
   a. Blackboard 	&lt;br /&gt;
   b. WebCT 	&lt;br /&gt;
   c. ATutor 	&lt;br /&gt;
   d. Moodle 	&lt;br /&gt;
   e. Claroline 	&lt;br /&gt;
   f. Ilias  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Importing ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When importing there are many options, but these do not influence Aiken Format import:&lt;br /&gt;
   Get category from file [_] &lt;br /&gt;
   Get context from file [_]&lt;br /&gt;
   Match grades [Error if grade not listed/Nearest grade if not listed]&lt;br /&gt;
   Stop on error [Yes/No] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Hints and Tips===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Use a text editor, like PSPad, (Windows &amp;quot;notepad&amp;quot; may not save with right encoding) to write the file with questions and save as a TXT file in UTF-8 format. Use only simple &#039;  not slant ones ´ ` ! Avoid other exotic characters like … HORIZONTAL ELLIPSIS (http://www.fileformat.info/info/unicode/char/2026/index.htm, three dots as a single character).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.heroku.com Moodle XML Converter] - more extensive version of AIKEN formt. Supports almost all standard Moodle questions types.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Import questions]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[GIFT]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Questions]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Quiz]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:AIKEN]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tjuly</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Import_glossary_entries&amp;diff=72602</id>
		<title>Import glossary entries</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Import_glossary_entries&amp;diff=72602"/>
		<updated>2010-06-03T08:36:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tjuly: /* Importing from Excel */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Glossaries}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Importing entries==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To import glossary entries via an XML file:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Follow the &amp;quot;Import entries&amp;quot; link at the top right of the main glossary page.&lt;br /&gt;
#Browse for the exported entries XML file on your computer.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the destination for the new entries, either the current glossary or a new one.&lt;br /&gt;
#If you want to import category information, click the checkbox.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the &amp;quot;Save changes&amp;quot; button. You&#039;ll then see a report of the entries and categories added to the glossary. If you enabled duplicate entries when you created the glossary, the import process will add all of the new definitions. Otherwise, it will not allow you to import any duplicate entries.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Troubleshooting ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Possible causes of problems importing entries:&lt;br /&gt;
* If there are mistakes in the XML file such as the &amp;lt;entries&amp;gt; tag being missing or the &amp;lt;info&amp;gt; tag being in the wrong place. May happen if you have constructed the XML file manually or with some sort of tool like mailmerge in Word and your template is wrong.&lt;br /&gt;
* If there are top bit set characters in the text of the entities like concepts, definitions or keywords. Replace things like &amp;amp; with &amp;amp;amp;amp;&lt;br /&gt;
* If there are tabs or spaces between entries. Not sure if spaces cause problems but best to remove any between the end of one tag and start of the next. e.g. Search and replace &amp;gt; &amp;lt; with &amp;gt;&amp;lt; via a text editor.&lt;br /&gt;
* In most cases the import is halted if any of these errors occur.&lt;br /&gt;
* Duplicates in the entries which clash with entries already when merging a glossary is usually not a problem.&lt;br /&gt;
* Warnings like &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Warning: exec() has been disabled for security reasons in /moodle/lib/uploadlib.php on line 603&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; may not be the problem when importing but may distract one from dealing with problems with the format of the XML file.&lt;br /&gt;
* HTML and XHTML tags written within CONCEPT or DEFINITION elements will fail on import, showing &amp;quot;Array&amp;quot; instead of the desired content. To remedy this, try writing the (X)HTML tags within &amp;lt;![CDATA[ ]]&amp;gt; markup.&lt;br /&gt;
* If the glossary entries contain images, image paths will need amending in order for the images to be displayed when the file is imported. A search and replace in the XML file before importing is one option, another is to use the [[Search and replace]] feature within Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Restoring a course backup==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An alternative method of importing glossary entries is to restore a Moodle course backup file containing a glossary. This method includes categories, images and attachments within glossary entries and if you also select users then the authors of entries are also imported if they were originally included in the backup.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Importing from Excel ==&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.irpens.co.uk/moodle/MoodleExcelToGlossary.xls David Fountain&#039;s Excel macro] An Excel workbook with macros to create an XML file.&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=91224&amp;amp;parent=489666 Yasu Imao&#039;s Moodle glossaryXMLconverter_html 4] A JavaScript based converter, works directly in your browser.&lt;br /&gt;
:(Both above methods are detailed [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=79120#p536148 in this discussion].)&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.heroku.com/questions/glossary Online XML converter ] Allows easily create glossary from existing materials. Supports different formats of entries.  &lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=123277 Importing into Moodle] contains an explanation of how to manually create an XML file from an Excel spreadsheet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Importing glossaries in WebCT format ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See this [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=10570 Using Moodle forum discussion]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/glossary/view.php?id=851 Glossary of common terms] with entries download link for importing to other Moodle sites&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Import and export FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[XML FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=142346 Backup a glossary] forum discussion&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[cs:Import slovníkových položek]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Glossareinträge_importieren]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Importer/exporter un glossaire]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tjuly</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Glossary_activity&amp;diff=72601</id>
		<title>Glossary activity</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Glossary_activity&amp;diff=72601"/>
		<updated>2010-06-03T08:19:04Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tjuly: /* See also */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Glossaries}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The [[Teacher_documentation#Activity_modules|Glossary activity]] allows participants to [[Adding/editing a glossary entry|create and maintain]] a list of definitions, like a dictionary. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Overview==&lt;br /&gt;
Glossary can be used in many ways.  The entries can be [[Viewing_a_glossary#Search_options|searched]] or [[Viewing a glossary#Browse_options|browsed]] in different formats. A glossary can be collaborative or entries only made by the teacher. Entries can be put in [[Editing glossary categories|categories]]. The [[Adding/editing_a_glossary#Automatically_link_glossary_entries|autolinking feature]], will highlight any word in the course which is located in the glossary.  Autolinking can be turned off in the quiz module. It is possible to import and export entries from one glossary to another.  Site wide (global) glossaries can be created that work in all courses. An entry can be linked to more than one key phrase.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Creative glossary practices==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While a basic glossary is important, creatively applying the glossary can really make an impact on your class.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Collaborative glossaries===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Instead of creating a glossary on your own, why not have the students create them as they encounter unfamiliar terms? A collaborative glossary can serve as a focal point for collaboration in a course. Each member of the class could be assigned to contribute a term, a definition, or comments on submitted definitions. Multiple definitions can be rated by you and by the students, with the highest-rated definitions accepted for the final class glossary.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When students are responsible for creating the definitions, they are much more likely to remember the word and the correct definition. Engaging in the process of learning, debating, and refining a glossary can go a long way toward helping students begin using new terms.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also structure multiple glossaries over the course of a semester. Break them up by unit, chapter, week, or any other organizational structure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have a large class, assign student teams to come up with definitions and answers. One strategy for managing large courses is to make each team responsible for one week’s worth of definitions, while all the other teams must rate and comment. Alternatively, each team could be responsible for one definition per chapter and then rate and comment on the other teams’ work.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Credit for word use===&lt;br /&gt;
This is a combination strategy using the forum and the auto-linking feature of the glossary. After you and your students have defined the glossary terms, it’s important for students to begin practising using the words in realistic contexts. Students, however, are usually reluctant to experiment with new terms. With the auto-linking feature, it’s easy to spot when a glossary word has been used in a forum or in a posting on the web site.&lt;br /&gt;
To encourage word use, assign a portion of the credit students receive for their forum postings for correct use of glossary terms. As you or other students rate posts, you can quickly scan for highlighted glossary words and award points for usage. You may even want to break the score down further. Perhaps award one point for using the word and two points for using it correctly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Links to glossary terms==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* In places such as forum posts and quizzes, terms will be automatically highlighted and linked if they are in the glossary. Sometimes, this may be unwanted. To avoid this on a case-by-case basis:&lt;br /&gt;
** In the HTML editor, select the term and press Ctrl-Alt-N. (You will see no visible change but the code below will appear in the HTML source.)&lt;br /&gt;
** If not using the editor, you can type the tag manually. In Moodle 1.9+, use: &amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;nolink&amp;quot;&amp;gt;...term...&amp;amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;In older versions of Moodle, use: &amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nolink&amp;gt;...term...&amp;lt;/nolink&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* See also: [[Quiz FAQ#How can I turn off glossary auto-linking in a quiz?]] for more ways to prevent auto-linking.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Using Moodle book]] Chapter 8: Glossaries&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://demo.moodle.org/course/view.php?id=604 Exchange Samples] in the Moodle Demo site for glossaries shared in the Moodle Exchange set up to look at.  &lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.heroku.com/questions/glossary Online Moodle XML Converter] allows to easily create glossaries from existing materials with minimum effort. Supports different types of formatting.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using Moodle forum discussions:&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=54403 Any creative ideas/ stories for using glossaries]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=145337 Glossary Generator]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Modules]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Glossar]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Glosarios]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[eu:Glosategiak]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Glossaire]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[nl:Woordenlijst]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:用語集モジュール]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tjuly</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Import_and_export_FAQ&amp;diff=72461</id>
		<title>Import and export FAQ</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Import_and_export_FAQ&amp;diff=72461"/>
		<updated>2010-05-27T11:27:23Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tjuly: /* How do I import glossary entries? */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== How do I import users? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* See [[Upload users]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How do I import course data? ==&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
* See [[Import course data]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I import and export grades?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Grade import]] (for Moodle 1.9 onwards).&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Grade export]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How do I import glossary entries? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For details see [[Import glossary entries]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Very useful tools are:&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.heroku.com/questions/glossary Online XML converter] Create XML on-line from text.  &lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.irpens.co.uk/moodle/MoodleExcelToGlossary.xls David Fountain&#039;s Excel macro] An Excel workbook with macros to create an XML file.&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=91224&amp;amp;parent=489666 Yasu Imao&#039;s Moodle glossaryXMLconverter_html 4] A JavaScript based converter, works directly in your browser.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How do I import and export database entries? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Database export]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Adding a database entry]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== How can I enable Excel export for students? ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the Database activity you have the ability to allow students to export all the data in the following formats: CSV, Excel and ODS (OpenDocument Spreadsheet from OpenOffice).&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:ExportTab.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With this functionality students can choose to export the data of all fields or only of selected fields. (Picture fields cannot be exported.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, this feature is not enabled by default for students. You need to override the student permissions for the Database activity and choose &#039;Allow&#039; for the permission to &#039;View presets from all users&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:EnableExportView.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will result in the &#039;Export&#039; tab being visible to students in the Database activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also see [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=133712 this thread] for a discussion on this.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I import and export questions?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* See [[Import questions]] and [[Export questions]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;OpenOffice&#039;&#039;&#039; template for creating questions in [[GIFT|GIFT format]]: http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=20705&amp;amp;parent=168385&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;MS Word&#039;&#039;&#039; template for creating questions in [[GIFT|GIFT format]]: http://www.soberit.hut.fi/sprg/resources/moodle/GiftConverter.html&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Excel&#039;&#039;&#039; to [[GIFT|GIFT format]] export tool: http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=66660&lt;br /&gt;
* The complete list: [[GIFT#Word_processors_and_Spreadsheets_tools_that_create_GIFTs|Word processors and Spreadsheets tools that create GIFTs]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Importing &amp;quot;GIFT&amp;quot; format files: https://www.acquin.org/moodle/help.php?file=formatgift.html&amp;amp;module=quiz&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://software.cristianoleoni.com/freebies/glossaryconv.php ATutor to Moodle converter] - see http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=115338.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/user.php?id=726938&amp;amp;course=5 Eoin Campbell is working on a XSLT based import/export module for Word] - stay tuned! &lt;br /&gt;
: See also his [http://www.moodle2word.net website for converting Moodle Questions into tables in a Microsoft Word file, and vice versa].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Which formats are used for importing questions?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to create questions outside of Moodle these two text based formats might be the most important:&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
*[[GIFT]] - Moodle &#039;proprietary&#039; text format for import and export. Reasonably comprehensive.&lt;br /&gt;
: See [[GIFT format]].&lt;br /&gt;
: Here is a 2-column GIFT format reference sheet: [http://buypct.com/gift_reference.pdf GIFT Reference Sheet]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Moodle XML]] - Moodle &#039;proprietary&#039; xml format for import and export. Very comprehensive. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You find the complete list of supported formats under [[Import questions]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Which file formats can I use? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== What encodings should I use? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The recommended standard encoding for all Moodle files is [[UTF-8]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* See [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=62251 Importing Entries Using a Text File] for an example where a UTF-8 file with [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Byte-order_mark BOM] caused Database Activity entries not being imported. See also MDL-9075 (&amp;quot;User Upload Failure when file contains UTF-8 BOM&amp;quot;).&lt;br /&gt;
: Some of this information is collected at [[UTF-8 and BOM]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See also: &lt;br /&gt;
* [http://morgretdesigns.wordpress.com/2008/03/07/changing-file-encoding-on-a-csv-with-openoffice-calc/ Changing File Encoding on a CSV with OpenOffice Calc]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.internet-business-solutions.gr/lang-en/e-commerce/44-strategies/65-utf-8-csv UTF-8 CSV]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:Category:UTF-8]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Search Moodle Forums [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/search.php?search=subject%3Aimport+&amp;amp;id=5 subject:import].&lt;br /&gt;
* Search Moodle Forums [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/search.php?search=subject%3Aexport+&amp;amp;id=5 subject:export].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[XML FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* There&#039;s an interesting project on [http://groups.drupal.org/node/21559 integrating Drupal and Moodle quizzes] in the Drupal in Education User Group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Import und Export FAQ]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tjuly</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Import_and_export_FAQ&amp;diff=72460</id>
		<title>Import and export FAQ</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Import_and_export_FAQ&amp;diff=72460"/>
		<updated>2010-05-27T10:48:18Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tjuly: /* How do I import glossary entries? */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== How do I import users? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* See [[Upload users]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How do I import course data? ==&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
* See [[Import course data]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I import and export grades?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Grade import]] (for Moodle 1.9 onwards).&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Grade export]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How do I import glossary entries? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For details see [[Import glossary entries]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Very useful tools are:&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.heroku.com/glossary/new Online XML converter] Create XML on-line from text.  &lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.irpens.co.uk/moodle/MoodleExcelToGlossary.xls David Fountain&#039;s Excel macro] An Excel workbook with macros to create an XML file.&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=91224&amp;amp;parent=489666 Yasu Imao&#039;s Moodle glossaryXMLconverter_html 4] A JavaScript based converter, works directly in your browser.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How do I import and export database entries? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Database export]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Adding a database entry]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== How can I enable Excel export for students? ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the Database activity you have the ability to allow students to export all the data in the following formats: CSV, Excel and ODS (OpenDocument Spreadsheet from OpenOffice).&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:ExportTab.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With this functionality students can choose to export the data of all fields or only of selected fields. (Picture fields cannot be exported.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, this feature is not enabled by default for students. You need to override the student permissions for the Database activity and choose &#039;Allow&#039; for the permission to &#039;View presets from all users&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:EnableExportView.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will result in the &#039;Export&#039; tab being visible to students in the Database activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also see [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=133712 this thread] for a discussion on this.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I import and export questions?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* See [[Import questions]] and [[Export questions]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;OpenOffice&#039;&#039;&#039; template for creating questions in [[GIFT|GIFT format]]: http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=20705&amp;amp;parent=168385&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;MS Word&#039;&#039;&#039; template for creating questions in [[GIFT|GIFT format]]: http://www.soberit.hut.fi/sprg/resources/moodle/GiftConverter.html&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Excel&#039;&#039;&#039; to [[GIFT|GIFT format]] export tool: http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=66660&lt;br /&gt;
* The complete list: [[GIFT#Word_processors_and_Spreadsheets_tools_that_create_GIFTs|Word processors and Spreadsheets tools that create GIFTs]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Importing &amp;quot;GIFT&amp;quot; format files: https://www.acquin.org/moodle/help.php?file=formatgift.html&amp;amp;module=quiz&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://software.cristianoleoni.com/freebies/glossaryconv.php ATutor to Moodle converter] - see http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=115338.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/user.php?id=726938&amp;amp;course=5 Eoin Campbell is working on a XSLT based import/export module for Word] - stay tuned! &lt;br /&gt;
: See also his [http://www.moodle2word.net website for converting Moodle Questions into tables in a Microsoft Word file, and vice versa].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Which formats are used for importing questions?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to create questions outside of Moodle these two text based formats might be the most important:&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
*[[GIFT]] - Moodle &#039;proprietary&#039; text format for import and export. Reasonably comprehensive.&lt;br /&gt;
: See [[GIFT format]].&lt;br /&gt;
: Here is a 2-column GIFT format reference sheet: [http://buypct.com/gift_reference.pdf GIFT Reference Sheet]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Moodle XML]] - Moodle &#039;proprietary&#039; xml format for import and export. Very comprehensive. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You find the complete list of supported formats under [[Import questions]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Which file formats can I use? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== What encodings should I use? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The recommended standard encoding for all Moodle files is [[UTF-8]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* See [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=62251 Importing Entries Using a Text File] for an example where a UTF-8 file with [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Byte-order_mark BOM] caused Database Activity entries not being imported. See also MDL-9075 (&amp;quot;User Upload Failure when file contains UTF-8 BOM&amp;quot;).&lt;br /&gt;
: Some of this information is collected at [[UTF-8 and BOM]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See also: &lt;br /&gt;
* [http://morgretdesigns.wordpress.com/2008/03/07/changing-file-encoding-on-a-csv-with-openoffice-calc/ Changing File Encoding on a CSV with OpenOffice Calc]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.internet-business-solutions.gr/lang-en/e-commerce/44-strategies/65-utf-8-csv UTF-8 CSV]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:Category:UTF-8]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Search Moodle Forums [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/search.php?search=subject%3Aimport+&amp;amp;id=5 subject:import].&lt;br /&gt;
* Search Moodle Forums [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/search.php?search=subject%3Aexport+&amp;amp;id=5 subject:export].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[XML FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* There&#039;s an interesting project on [http://groups.drupal.org/node/21559 integrating Drupal and Moodle quizzes] in the Drupal in Education User Group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Import und Export FAQ]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tjuly</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Import_and_export_FAQ&amp;diff=72459</id>
		<title>Import and export FAQ</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Import_and_export_FAQ&amp;diff=72459"/>
		<updated>2010-05-27T10:47:58Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tjuly: /* How do I import glossary entries? */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== How do I import users? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* See [[Upload users]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How do I import course data? ==&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
* See [[Import course data]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I import and export grades?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Grade import]] (for Moodle 1.9 onwards).&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Grade export]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How do I import glossary entries? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For details see [[Import glossary entries]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Very useful tools are:&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.heroku.com/glossary/new Online XML converter] Create XML on-line from text.  Just put text as following: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;Term1&lt;br /&gt;
Definition1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Term2&lt;br /&gt;
Definition2&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.irpens.co.uk/moodle/MoodleExcelToGlossary.xls David Fountain&#039;s Excel macro] An Excel workbook with macros to create an XML file.&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=91224&amp;amp;parent=489666 Yasu Imao&#039;s Moodle glossaryXMLconverter_html 4] A JavaScript based converter, works directly in your browser.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How do I import and export database entries? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Database export]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Adding a database entry]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== How can I enable Excel export for students? ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the Database activity you have the ability to allow students to export all the data in the following formats: CSV, Excel and ODS (OpenDocument Spreadsheet from OpenOffice).&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:ExportTab.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With this functionality students can choose to export the data of all fields or only of selected fields. (Picture fields cannot be exported.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, this feature is not enabled by default for students. You need to override the student permissions for the Database activity and choose &#039;Allow&#039; for the permission to &#039;View presets from all users&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:EnableExportView.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will result in the &#039;Export&#039; tab being visible to students in the Database activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also see [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=133712 this thread] for a discussion on this.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I import and export questions?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* See [[Import questions]] and [[Export questions]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;OpenOffice&#039;&#039;&#039; template for creating questions in [[GIFT|GIFT format]]: http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=20705&amp;amp;parent=168385&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;MS Word&#039;&#039;&#039; template for creating questions in [[GIFT|GIFT format]]: http://www.soberit.hut.fi/sprg/resources/moodle/GiftConverter.html&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Excel&#039;&#039;&#039; to [[GIFT|GIFT format]] export tool: http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=66660&lt;br /&gt;
* The complete list: [[GIFT#Word_processors_and_Spreadsheets_tools_that_create_GIFTs|Word processors and Spreadsheets tools that create GIFTs]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Importing &amp;quot;GIFT&amp;quot; format files: https://www.acquin.org/moodle/help.php?file=formatgift.html&amp;amp;module=quiz&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://software.cristianoleoni.com/freebies/glossaryconv.php ATutor to Moodle converter] - see http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=115338.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/user.php?id=726938&amp;amp;course=5 Eoin Campbell is working on a XSLT based import/export module for Word] - stay tuned! &lt;br /&gt;
: See also his [http://www.moodle2word.net website for converting Moodle Questions into tables in a Microsoft Word file, and vice versa].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Which formats are used for importing questions?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to create questions outside of Moodle these two text based formats might be the most important:&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
*[[GIFT]] - Moodle &#039;proprietary&#039; text format for import and export. Reasonably comprehensive.&lt;br /&gt;
: See [[GIFT format]].&lt;br /&gt;
: Here is a 2-column GIFT format reference sheet: [http://buypct.com/gift_reference.pdf GIFT Reference Sheet]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Moodle XML]] - Moodle &#039;proprietary&#039; xml format for import and export. Very comprehensive. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You find the complete list of supported formats under [[Import questions]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Which file formats can I use? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== What encodings should I use? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The recommended standard encoding for all Moodle files is [[UTF-8]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* See [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=62251 Importing Entries Using a Text File] for an example where a UTF-8 file with [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Byte-order_mark BOM] caused Database Activity entries not being imported. See also MDL-9075 (&amp;quot;User Upload Failure when file contains UTF-8 BOM&amp;quot;).&lt;br /&gt;
: Some of this information is collected at [[UTF-8 and BOM]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See also: &lt;br /&gt;
* [http://morgretdesigns.wordpress.com/2008/03/07/changing-file-encoding-on-a-csv-with-openoffice-calc/ Changing File Encoding on a CSV with OpenOffice Calc]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.internet-business-solutions.gr/lang-en/e-commerce/44-strategies/65-utf-8-csv UTF-8 CSV]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:Category:UTF-8]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Search Moodle Forums [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/search.php?search=subject%3Aimport+&amp;amp;id=5 subject:import].&lt;br /&gt;
* Search Moodle Forums [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/search.php?search=subject%3Aexport+&amp;amp;id=5 subject:export].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[XML FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* There&#039;s an interesting project on [http://groups.drupal.org/node/21559 integrating Drupal and Moodle quizzes] in the Drupal in Education User Group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Import und Export FAQ]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tjuly</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Import_and_export_FAQ&amp;diff=72458</id>
		<title>Import and export FAQ</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Import_and_export_FAQ&amp;diff=72458"/>
		<updated>2010-05-27T10:46:43Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tjuly: /* How do I import glossary entries? */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== How do I import users? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* See [[Upload users]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How do I import course data? ==&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
* See [[Import course data]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I import and export grades?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Grade import]] (for Moodle 1.9 onwards).&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Grade export]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How do I import glossary entries? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For details see [[Import glossary entries]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Very useful tools are:&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.heroku.com/glossary/new Online XML converter] Create XML online from text.  Just put text as foolowing: &lt;br /&gt;
Term1&lt;br /&gt;
Definition1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Term2&lt;br /&gt;
Definition2&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.irpens.co.uk/moodle/MoodleExcelToGlossary.xls David Fountain&#039;s Excel macro] An Excel workbook with macros to create an XML file.&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=91224&amp;amp;parent=489666 Yasu Imao&#039;s Moodle glossaryXMLconverter_html 4] A JavaScript based converter, works directly in your browser.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How do I import and export database entries? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Database export]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Adding a database entry]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== How can I enable Excel export for students? ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the Database activity you have the ability to allow students to export all the data in the following formats: CSV, Excel and ODS (OpenDocument Spreadsheet from OpenOffice).&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:ExportTab.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With this functionality students can choose to export the data of all fields or only of selected fields. (Picture fields cannot be exported.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, this feature is not enabled by default for students. You need to override the student permissions for the Database activity and choose &#039;Allow&#039; for the permission to &#039;View presets from all users&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:EnableExportView.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will result in the &#039;Export&#039; tab being visible to students in the Database activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also see [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=133712 this thread] for a discussion on this.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I import and export questions?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* See [[Import questions]] and [[Export questions]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;OpenOffice&#039;&#039;&#039; template for creating questions in [[GIFT|GIFT format]]: http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=20705&amp;amp;parent=168385&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;MS Word&#039;&#039;&#039; template for creating questions in [[GIFT|GIFT format]]: http://www.soberit.hut.fi/sprg/resources/moodle/GiftConverter.html&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Excel&#039;&#039;&#039; to [[GIFT|GIFT format]] export tool: http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=66660&lt;br /&gt;
* The complete list: [[GIFT#Word_processors_and_Spreadsheets_tools_that_create_GIFTs|Word processors and Spreadsheets tools that create GIFTs]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Importing &amp;quot;GIFT&amp;quot; format files: https://www.acquin.org/moodle/help.php?file=formatgift.html&amp;amp;module=quiz&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://software.cristianoleoni.com/freebies/glossaryconv.php ATutor to Moodle converter] - see http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=115338.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/user.php?id=726938&amp;amp;course=5 Eoin Campbell is working on a XSLT based import/export module for Word] - stay tuned! &lt;br /&gt;
: See also his [http://www.moodle2word.net website for converting Moodle Questions into tables in a Microsoft Word file, and vice versa].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Which formats are used for importing questions?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to create questions outside of Moodle these two text based formats might be the most important:&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
*[[GIFT]] - Moodle &#039;proprietary&#039; text format for import and export. Reasonably comprehensive.&lt;br /&gt;
: See [[GIFT format]].&lt;br /&gt;
: Here is a 2-column GIFT format reference sheet: [http://buypct.com/gift_reference.pdf GIFT Reference Sheet]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Moodle XML]] - Moodle &#039;proprietary&#039; xml format for import and export. Very comprehensive. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You find the complete list of supported formats under [[Import questions]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Which file formats can I use? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== What encodings should I use? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The recommended standard encoding for all Moodle files is [[UTF-8]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* See [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=62251 Importing Entries Using a Text File] for an example where a UTF-8 file with [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Byte-order_mark BOM] caused Database Activity entries not being imported. See also MDL-9075 (&amp;quot;User Upload Failure when file contains UTF-8 BOM&amp;quot;).&lt;br /&gt;
: Some of this information is collected at [[UTF-8 and BOM]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See also: &lt;br /&gt;
* [http://morgretdesigns.wordpress.com/2008/03/07/changing-file-encoding-on-a-csv-with-openoffice-calc/ Changing File Encoding on a CSV with OpenOffice Calc]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.internet-business-solutions.gr/lang-en/e-commerce/44-strategies/65-utf-8-csv UTF-8 CSV]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:Category:UTF-8]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Search Moodle Forums [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/search.php?search=subject%3Aimport+&amp;amp;id=5 subject:import].&lt;br /&gt;
* Search Moodle Forums [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/search.php?search=subject%3Aexport+&amp;amp;id=5 subject:export].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[XML FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* There&#039;s an interesting project on [http://groups.drupal.org/node/21559 integrating Drupal and Moodle quizzes] in the Drupal in Education User Group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Import und Export FAQ]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tjuly</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Import_and_export_FAQ&amp;diff=72457</id>
		<title>Import and export FAQ</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Import_and_export_FAQ&amp;diff=72457"/>
		<updated>2010-05-27T10:46:25Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tjuly: /* How do I import glossary entries? */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== How do I import users? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* See [[Upload users]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How do I import course data? ==&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
* See [[Import course data]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I import and export grades?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Grade import]] (for Moodle 1.9 onwards).&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Grade export]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How do I import glossary entries? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For details see [[Import glossary entries]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Very useful tools are:&lt;br /&gt;
* [http//moodle.heroku.com/glossary/new Online XML converter] Create XML online from text.&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.irpens.co.uk/moodle/MoodleExcelToGlossary.xls David Fountain&#039;s Excel macro] An Excel workbook with macros to create an XML file.&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=91224&amp;amp;parent=489666 Yasu Imao&#039;s Moodle glossaryXMLconverter_html 4] A JavaScript based converter, works directly in your browser.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How do I import and export database entries? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Database export]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Adding a database entry]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== How can I enable Excel export for students? ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the Database activity you have the ability to allow students to export all the data in the following formats: CSV, Excel and ODS (OpenDocument Spreadsheet from OpenOffice).&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:ExportTab.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With this functionality students can choose to export the data of all fields or only of selected fields. (Picture fields cannot be exported.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, this feature is not enabled by default for students. You need to override the student permissions for the Database activity and choose &#039;Allow&#039; for the permission to &#039;View presets from all users&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:EnableExportView.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will result in the &#039;Export&#039; tab being visible to students in the Database activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also see [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=133712 this thread] for a discussion on this.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I import and export questions?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* See [[Import questions]] and [[Export questions]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;OpenOffice&#039;&#039;&#039; template for creating questions in [[GIFT|GIFT format]]: http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=20705&amp;amp;parent=168385&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;MS Word&#039;&#039;&#039; template for creating questions in [[GIFT|GIFT format]]: http://www.soberit.hut.fi/sprg/resources/moodle/GiftConverter.html&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Excel&#039;&#039;&#039; to [[GIFT|GIFT format]] export tool: http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=66660&lt;br /&gt;
* The complete list: [[GIFT#Word_processors_and_Spreadsheets_tools_that_create_GIFTs|Word processors and Spreadsheets tools that create GIFTs]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Importing &amp;quot;GIFT&amp;quot; format files: https://www.acquin.org/moodle/help.php?file=formatgift.html&amp;amp;module=quiz&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://software.cristianoleoni.com/freebies/glossaryconv.php ATutor to Moodle converter] - see http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=115338.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/user.php?id=726938&amp;amp;course=5 Eoin Campbell is working on a XSLT based import/export module for Word] - stay tuned! &lt;br /&gt;
: See also his [http://www.moodle2word.net website for converting Moodle Questions into tables in a Microsoft Word file, and vice versa].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Which formats are used for importing questions?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to create questions outside of Moodle these two text based formats might be the most important:&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
*[[GIFT]] - Moodle &#039;proprietary&#039; text format for import and export. Reasonably comprehensive.&lt;br /&gt;
: See [[GIFT format]].&lt;br /&gt;
: Here is a 2-column GIFT format reference sheet: [http://buypct.com/gift_reference.pdf GIFT Reference Sheet]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Moodle XML]] - Moodle &#039;proprietary&#039; xml format for import and export. Very comprehensive. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You find the complete list of supported formats under [[Import questions]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Which file formats can I use? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== What encodings should I use? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The recommended standard encoding for all Moodle files is [[UTF-8]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* See [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=62251 Importing Entries Using a Text File] for an example where a UTF-8 file with [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Byte-order_mark BOM] caused Database Activity entries not being imported. See also MDL-9075 (&amp;quot;User Upload Failure when file contains UTF-8 BOM&amp;quot;).&lt;br /&gt;
: Some of this information is collected at [[UTF-8 and BOM]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See also: &lt;br /&gt;
* [http://morgretdesigns.wordpress.com/2008/03/07/changing-file-encoding-on-a-csv-with-openoffice-calc/ Changing File Encoding on a CSV with OpenOffice Calc]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.internet-business-solutions.gr/lang-en/e-commerce/44-strategies/65-utf-8-csv UTF-8 CSV]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:Category:UTF-8]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Search Moodle Forums [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/search.php?search=subject%3Aimport+&amp;amp;id=5 subject:import].&lt;br /&gt;
* Search Moodle Forums [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/search.php?search=subject%3Aexport+&amp;amp;id=5 subject:export].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[XML FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* There&#039;s an interesting project on [http://groups.drupal.org/node/21559 integrating Drupal and Moodle quizzes] in the Drupal in Education User Group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Import und Export FAQ]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tjuly</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Import_and_export_FAQ&amp;diff=72456</id>
		<title>Import and export FAQ</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Import_and_export_FAQ&amp;diff=72456"/>
		<updated>2010-05-27T10:45:15Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tjuly: /* How do I import glossary entries? */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== How do I import users? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* See [[Upload users]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How do I import course data? ==&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
* See [[Import course data]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I import and export grades?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Grade import]] (for Moodle 1.9 onwards).&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Grade export]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How do I import glossary entries? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For details see [[Import glossary entries]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Very useful tools are:&lt;br /&gt;
* [http//moodle.heroku.com/glossary/new Online XML converter] Create XML online from text. Just put text as foolowing: &lt;br /&gt;
Term1&lt;br /&gt;
Definition1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Term2&lt;br /&gt;
Definition2&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.irpens.co.uk/moodle/MoodleExcelToGlossary.xls David Fountain&#039;s Excel macro] An Excel workbook with macros to create an XML file.&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=91224&amp;amp;parent=489666 Yasu Imao&#039;s Moodle glossaryXMLconverter_html 4] A JavaScript based converter, works directly in your browser.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How do I import and export database entries? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Database export]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Adding a database entry]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== How can I enable Excel export for students? ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the Database activity you have the ability to allow students to export all the data in the following formats: CSV, Excel and ODS (OpenDocument Spreadsheet from OpenOffice).&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:ExportTab.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With this functionality students can choose to export the data of all fields or only of selected fields. (Picture fields cannot be exported.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, this feature is not enabled by default for students. You need to override the student permissions for the Database activity and choose &#039;Allow&#039; for the permission to &#039;View presets from all users&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:EnableExportView.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will result in the &#039;Export&#039; tab being visible to students in the Database activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also see [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=133712 this thread] for a discussion on this.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I import and export questions?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* See [[Import questions]] and [[Export questions]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;OpenOffice&#039;&#039;&#039; template for creating questions in [[GIFT|GIFT format]]: http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=20705&amp;amp;parent=168385&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;MS Word&#039;&#039;&#039; template for creating questions in [[GIFT|GIFT format]]: http://www.soberit.hut.fi/sprg/resources/moodle/GiftConverter.html&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Excel&#039;&#039;&#039; to [[GIFT|GIFT format]] export tool: http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=66660&lt;br /&gt;
* The complete list: [[GIFT#Word_processors_and_Spreadsheets_tools_that_create_GIFTs|Word processors and Spreadsheets tools that create GIFTs]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Importing &amp;quot;GIFT&amp;quot; format files: https://www.acquin.org/moodle/help.php?file=formatgift.html&amp;amp;module=quiz&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://software.cristianoleoni.com/freebies/glossaryconv.php ATutor to Moodle converter] - see http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=115338.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/user.php?id=726938&amp;amp;course=5 Eoin Campbell is working on a XSLT based import/export module for Word] - stay tuned! &lt;br /&gt;
: See also his [http://www.moodle2word.net website for converting Moodle Questions into tables in a Microsoft Word file, and vice versa].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Which formats are used for importing questions?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to create questions outside of Moodle these two text based formats might be the most important:&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
*[[GIFT]] - Moodle &#039;proprietary&#039; text format for import and export. Reasonably comprehensive.&lt;br /&gt;
: See [[GIFT format]].&lt;br /&gt;
: Here is a 2-column GIFT format reference sheet: [http://buypct.com/gift_reference.pdf GIFT Reference Sheet]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Moodle XML]] - Moodle &#039;proprietary&#039; xml format for import and export. Very comprehensive. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You find the complete list of supported formats under [[Import questions]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Which file formats can I use? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== What encodings should I use? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The recommended standard encoding for all Moodle files is [[UTF-8]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* See [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=62251 Importing Entries Using a Text File] for an example where a UTF-8 file with [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Byte-order_mark BOM] caused Database Activity entries not being imported. See also MDL-9075 (&amp;quot;User Upload Failure when file contains UTF-8 BOM&amp;quot;).&lt;br /&gt;
: Some of this information is collected at [[UTF-8 and BOM]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See also: &lt;br /&gt;
* [http://morgretdesigns.wordpress.com/2008/03/07/changing-file-encoding-on-a-csv-with-openoffice-calc/ Changing File Encoding on a CSV with OpenOffice Calc]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.internet-business-solutions.gr/lang-en/e-commerce/44-strategies/65-utf-8-csv UTF-8 CSV]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:Category:UTF-8]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Search Moodle Forums [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/search.php?search=subject%3Aimport+&amp;amp;id=5 subject:import].&lt;br /&gt;
* Search Moodle Forums [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/search.php?search=subject%3Aexport+&amp;amp;id=5 subject:export].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[XML FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* There&#039;s an interesting project on [http://groups.drupal.org/node/21559 integrating Drupal and Moodle quizzes] in the Drupal in Education User Group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Import und Export FAQ]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tjuly</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=XML_FAQ&amp;diff=72455</id>
		<title>XML FAQ</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=XML_FAQ&amp;diff=72455"/>
		<updated>2010-05-27T10:41:48Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tjuly: /* Are there tools for converting to and from Moodle XML? */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;(If you don&#039;t find the answer to your question here, just post the question. There might be someone out there to provide the answer.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==XML in general==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Where do I find general information about XML?===&lt;br /&gt;
* http://www.w3schools.com/xml/default.asp - A host of information and hands-on examples&lt;br /&gt;
*http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/XML - A good starting point&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Moodle XML==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Is there only one kind of Moodle XML?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No, there are (at least) two different kinds of Moodle XML, one for importing/exporting glossaries and one for questions (quizzes), the latter being the one usually referred to as &amp;quot;Moodle XML&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then there is XML in the SCORM/IMS packages that Moodle can import and must be able to handle. These packages are educational content that has been marked up in a special way to be able to be used in compatible Learning Management Systems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The course backup and restore process also generates an XML file (inside the zip file) that contains all the information about the course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Where do I find documentation about Moodle XML?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The official documentation: [[Moodle XML]]&lt;br /&gt;
* A more thorough documentation: [http://www.qedoc.org/en/index.php?title=Moodle_XML_format Moodle XML format] by Quedoc&lt;br /&gt;
: [http://www.qedoc.org/en/index.php?title=Problems_when_transferring_XML_format_into_Moodle Problems when transferring XML format into Moodle]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tools==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Are there tools for converting to and from Moodle XML?===&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=91224#p489764 Glossary to XML Converter]&lt;br /&gt;
:A simple HTML file which converts TSV data to XML using JavaScript&lt;br /&gt;
* Microsoft Office macros: http://finemetronome.com/moodle/&lt;br /&gt;
* OpenOffice XML filters (TBA see [https://docs.moodle.org/en/User:Frank_Ralf/Moodle_XML1#OpenOffice_.26_XML] for some pointers)&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.heroku.com Online XML Converter - allow to create XML from text files for quizzes and glossaries]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How can I view and edit XML files?===&lt;br /&gt;
XML is just text so you can view and edit it with any text editor. However, this isn&#039;t very easy for anything more than a trivial file. There are a number of dedicated XML editors available for many platforms. If you only need to view the XML, most browsers are able to render XML files. Some even let you view the source text and do some basic editing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Import and export FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:XML FAQ]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tjuly</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=XML_FAQ&amp;diff=72386</id>
		<title>XML FAQ</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=XML_FAQ&amp;diff=72386"/>
		<updated>2010-05-24T12:03:41Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tjuly: /* Are there tools for converting to and from Moodle XML? */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;(If you don&#039;t find the answer to your question here, just post the question. There might be someone out there to provide the answer.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==XML in general==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Where do I find general information about XML?===&lt;br /&gt;
* http://www.w3schools.com/xml/default.asp - A host of information and hands-on examples&lt;br /&gt;
*http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/XML - A good starting point&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Moodle XML==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Is there only one kind of Moodle XML?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No, there are (at least) two different kinds of Moodle XML, one for importing/exporting glossaries and one for questions (quizzes), the latter being the one usually referred to as &amp;quot;Moodle XML&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then there is XML in the SCORM/IMS packages that Moodle can import and must be able to handle. These packages are educational content that has been marked up in a special way to be able to be used in compatible Learning Management Systems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The course backup and restore process also generates an XML file (inside the zip file) that contains all the information about the course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Where do I find documentation about Moodle XML?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The official documentation: [[Moodle XML]]&lt;br /&gt;
* A more thorough documentation: [http://www.qedoc.org/en/index.php?title=Moodle_XML_format Moodle XML format] by Quedoc&lt;br /&gt;
: [http://www.qedoc.org/en/index.php?title=Problems_when_transferring_XML_format_into_Moodle Problems when transferring XML format into Moodle]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tools==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Are there tools for converting to and from Moodle XML?===&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=91224#p489764 Glossary to XML Converter]&lt;br /&gt;
:A simple HTML file which converts TSV data to XML using JavaScript&lt;br /&gt;
* Microsoft Office macros: http://finemetronome.com/moodle/&lt;br /&gt;
* OpenOffice XML filters (TBA see [https://docs.moodle.org/en/User:Frank_Ralf/Moodle_XML1#OpenOffice_.26_XML] for some pointers)&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.heroku.com/questions/new Online XML Converter - allow to create XML from text files]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How can I view and edit XML files?===&lt;br /&gt;
XML is just text so you can view and edit it with any text editor. However, this isn&#039;t very easy for anything more than a trivial file. There are a number of dedicated XML editors available for many platforms. If you only need to view the XML, most browsers are able to render XML files. Some even let you view the source text and do some basic editing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Import and export FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:XML FAQ]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tjuly</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Moodle_XML_format&amp;diff=72384</id>
		<title>Moodle XML format</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Moodle_XML_format&amp;diff=72384"/>
		<updated>2010-05-24T10:57:11Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tjuly: /* Useful utilities */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;The XML Format is a Moodle-specific format for importing and exporting questions to be used with the [[Quiz module]]. The format has been developed within the Moodle Community but other software may support it to a greater or lesser degree.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==A word about validity==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The XML parser assumes that the XML file is well formed and does not detect or report errors. If it is not you are very likely to get unexpected errors. If you are hand-coding the XML file it is strongly recommended that you pass it through some sort of XML verifier before importing into Moodle. A simple way to do this is to open the XML file using Firefox or Internet Explorer. Note particularly that embedded HTML fragments should be within CDATA sections.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Overall structure of XML file==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The file is enclosed by tags as follows. It is &#039;&#039;&#039;important&#039;&#039;&#039; to make sure the xml-line is really the first line of the file. A blank first line turns your otherwise compliant file into a source of frustration. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code xml&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;?xml version=&amp;quot;1.0&amp;quot; ?&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;quiz&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 .&lt;br /&gt;
 .&lt;br /&gt;
 .&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/quiz&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within the &amp;lt;quiz&amp;gt; tags are any number of &amp;lt;question&amp;gt; tags. One of these &amp;lt;question&amp;gt; tags can be a dummy question with a &#039;&#039;category&#039;&#039; type to specify a category for the import/export. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code xml&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;question type=&amp;quot;category&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;category&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;$course$/XXXX&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/category&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/question&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Where XXXX is the new category name. If the category exists, the question(s) will be added to the existing course; otherwise a new category will be created. This only works if you have &amp;quot;Get category from file&amp;quot; checked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Multiple categories can be specified in the same file. Just add another dummy &#039;category&#039; question each time you would like to establish a new category and the questions that follow it will be placed there.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The file must be encoded in [[UTF8]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle XML import and export are balanced in functionality, so if you need to understand the format you can simply create some questions and export them to see what it looks like.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tags common to all question types==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A question is written as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code xml&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;question type=&amp;quot;multichoice|truefalse|shortanswer|matching|cloze|essay|numerical|description&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;name&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
         &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;Name of question&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;/name&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;questiontext format=&amp;quot;html&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
         &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;What is the answer to this question?&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;/questiontext&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     .&lt;br /&gt;
     .&lt;br /&gt;
     .&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/question&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Format&amp;quot; selects the [[Formatting options]] for the question text. The options are &#039;&#039;&#039;moodle_auto_format&#039;&#039;&#039; (the default), &#039;&#039;&#039;html&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;plain_text&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;markdown&#039;&#039;&#039;. The choice effects the way in which the text will be displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Further tags, which usually include at least one &amp;lt;answer&amp;gt; tag, follow in the space marked with dots as child nodes to the &amp;lt;question&amp;gt; tag. The response-related tags are listed further down on this page. Various (optional?) tags are possible. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* penalty&lt;br /&gt;
* generalfeedback&lt;br /&gt;
* defaultgrade&lt;br /&gt;
* hidden&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;image&amp;gt; tag contains the url of any included image. Nested within the &amp;lt;image&amp;gt; tag may be an &amp;lt;image_base64&amp;gt; tag which contains the actual image data encoded in base64 [http://www.php.net/manual/en/function.base64-encode.php].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;In the following question type examples the common parts of the question are not shown to improve clarity. It&#039;s a good idea to export some examples yourself to see a full example.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Multiple choice==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MC questions have one &amp;lt;answer&amp;gt; tag for each choice. Each choice can carry feedback and score weighting (by using the fraction attribute). In addition, an MC question has the following tags:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* single &#039;&#039;(values: true/false)&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* shuffleanswers &#039;&#039;(values: 1/0)&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* correctfeedback &lt;br /&gt;
* partiallycorrectfeedback &lt;br /&gt;
* incorrectfeedback&lt;br /&gt;
* answernumbering (allowed values: &#039;none&#039;, &#039;abc&#039;, &#039;ABCD&#039; or &#039;123&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;single&amp;gt; tag is used to distinguish single response (radio button) and multiple response (checkbox) variants.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code xml&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;question type=&amp;quot;multichoice&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;answer fraction=&amp;quot;100&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;The correct answer&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;feedback&amp;gt;&amp;lt;text&amp;gt;Correct!&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/feedback&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/answer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;answer fraction=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;A distractor&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;feedback&amp;gt;&amp;lt;text&amp;gt;Ooops!&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/feedback&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/answer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;answer fraction=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;Another distractor&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;feedback&amp;gt;&amp;lt;text&amp;gt;Ooops!&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/feedback&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/answer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;shuffleanswers&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/shuffleanswers&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;single&amp;gt;true&amp;lt;/single&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;answernumbering&amp;gt;abc&amp;lt;/answernumbering&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== True/false ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Two answer tags are given, one which is true, and one which is false. The fraction attribute of the answer tag identifies which option is correct (100) and which is false (0). Feedback is supported. The following example shows the format when true is the correct answer and false is wrong.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code xml&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;question type=&amp;quot;truefalse&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;answer fraction=&amp;quot;100&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;true&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;feedback&amp;gt;&amp;lt;text&amp;gt;Correct!&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/feedback&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/answer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;answer fraction=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;false&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;feedback&amp;gt;&amp;lt;text&amp;gt;Ooops!&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/feedback&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/answer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Short answer  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The short answer question type supports alternative correct responses, each with its own weighting and feedback.  The Moodle XML format uses one &amp;lt;answer&amp;gt; tag for each of the alternative correct answers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;usecase&amp;gt; tag toggles case-sensitivity with the values 1/0. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code xml&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;question type=&amp;quot;shortanswer&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;answer fraction=&amp;quot;100&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;The correct answer&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;feedback&amp;gt;&amp;lt;text&amp;gt;Correct!&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/feedback&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/answer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;question type=&amp;quot;shortanswer&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;answer fraction=&amp;quot;100&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;The correct answer&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;feedback&amp;gt;&amp;lt;text&amp;gt;Correct!&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/feedback&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/answer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;answer fraction=&amp;quot;100&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;An alternative answer&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;feedback&amp;gt;&amp;lt;text&amp;gt;Correct!&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/feedback&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/answer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Numerical response ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following is a simplified version of the Moodle XML format for numerical responses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code xml&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;question type=&amp;quot;numerical&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;answer fraction=&amp;quot;100&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;23&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;feedback&amp;gt;&amp;lt;text&amp;gt;Feedback&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/feedback&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/answer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle also supports a &amp;lt;tolerance&amp;gt; tag (how accurate must the number be?) and one or more &amp;lt;unit&amp;gt; tags. Unit tags have names and multipliers. E.g. if the main answer is in kilometres, an additional answer could be the equivalent in metres with a multiplier of 1000.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; prior to 1.7.2 the fraction was expressed as a value between 0 and 1 in a &amp;lt;fraction&amp;gt; element and the answer value was &#039;&#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039;&#039; enclosed in &amp;lt;text&amp;gt; tags. This format of the numerical question type is deprecated but will still be correctly imported if found (for now).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Matching ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pair matching responses use the &amp;lt;shuffleanswers&amp;gt; tag to determine whether the order of the items should be randomized.&lt;br /&gt;
Each pair is contained inside a &amp;lt;subquestion&amp;gt; tag. The first item of each pair is contained with a &amp;lt;text&amp;gt; tag, while the second has an &amp;lt;answer&amp;gt; tag around it as well. Feedback and score weighting is not supported by Moodle for this response type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code xml&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;question type=&amp;quot;matching&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;subquestion&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;This is the 1st item in the 1st pair.&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;answer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
         &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;This is the 2nd item in the 1st pair.&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;/answer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/subquestion&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;subquestion&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;This is the 1st item in the 2nd pair.&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;answer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
         &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;This is the 2nd item in the 2nd pair.&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;/answer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/subquestion&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;shuffleanswers&amp;gt;true&amp;lt;/shuffleanswers&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Essay ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An example of the essay type question...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code xml&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;question type=&amp;quot;essay&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;answer fraction=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/answer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;/question&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There isn&#039;t an answer and there isn&#039;t a grade in this case. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; prior to 1.7.2 the fraction was expressed as a value between 0 and 1 in a &amp;lt;fraction&amp;gt; element and the answer value was &#039;&#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039;&#039; enclosed in &amp;lt;text&amp;gt; tags. This format of the essay question type is deprecated but will still be correctly imported if found (for now).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Other question types ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Cloze ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is supported, and depends on a special format for the &amp;lt;questiontext&amp;gt; tag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Description response type===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This response type has no further tags other than those contained in the question header (such as &amp;lt;questiontext&amp;gt;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Random matching ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle has a question type which consists of taking short answer questions in the same quiz and displaying them as a pair matching exercise. However Moodle is neither able to export nor import this question type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Useful utilities==&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://finemetronome.com/moodle/ Word Template for generating Moodle XML].&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.heroku.com/questions/new/ Online Moodle XML converter from txt files].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.qedoc.org/en/index.php?title=Moodle_XML_format Quedoc&#039;s Moodle XML documentation]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle Docs&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Export questions]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Import questions]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[GIFT format]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Aiken format]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[XML FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Import and export FAQ]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Questions]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:Moodle XMLフォーマット]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de: Moodle XML-Format]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tjuly</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Moodle_XML_format&amp;diff=72194</id>
		<title>Moodle XML format</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Moodle_XML_format&amp;diff=72194"/>
		<updated>2010-05-16T15:58:48Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Tjuly: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;The XML Format is a Moodle-specific format for importing and exporting questions to be used with the [[Quiz module]]. The format has been developed within the Moodle Community but other software may support it to a greater or lesser degree.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==A word about validity==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The XML parser assumes that the XML file is well formed and does not detect or report errors. If it is not you are very likely to get unexpected errors. If you are hand-coding the XML file it is strongly recommended that you pass it through some sort of XML verifier before importing into Moodle. A simple way to do this is to open the XML file using Firefox or Internet Explorer. Note particularly that embedded HTML fragments should be within CDATA sections.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Overall structure of XML file==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The file is enclosed by tags as follows. It is &#039;&#039;&#039;important&#039;&#039;&#039; to make sure the xml-line is really the first line of the file. A blank first line turns your otherwise compliant file into a source of frustration. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code xml&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;?xml version=&amp;quot;1.0&amp;quot; ?&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;quiz&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 .&lt;br /&gt;
 .&lt;br /&gt;
 .&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/quiz&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within the &amp;lt;quiz&amp;gt; tags are any number of &amp;lt;question&amp;gt; tags. One of these &amp;lt;question&amp;gt; tags can be a dummy question with a &#039;&#039;category&#039;&#039; type to specify a category for the import/export. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code xml&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;question type=&amp;quot;category&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;category&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;$course$/XXXX&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/category&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/question&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Where XXXX is the new category name. If the category exists, the question(s) will be added to the existing course; otherwise a new category will be created. This only works if you have &amp;quot;Get category from file&amp;quot; checked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Multiple categories can be specified in the same file. Just add another dummy &#039;category&#039; question each time you would like to establish a new category and the questions that follow it will be placed there.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The file must be encoded in [[UTF8]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle XML import and export are balanced in functionality, so if you need to understand the format you can simply create some questions and export them to see what it looks like.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tags common to all question types==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A question is written as follows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code xml&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;question type=&amp;quot;multichoice|truefalse|shortanswer|matching|cloze|essay|numerical|description&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;name&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
         &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;Name of question&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;/name&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;questiontext format=&amp;quot;html&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
         &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;What is the answer to this question?&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;/questiontext&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     .&lt;br /&gt;
     .&lt;br /&gt;
     .&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/question&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Format&amp;quot; selects the [[Formatting options]] for the question text. The options are &#039;&#039;&#039;moodle_auto_format&#039;&#039;&#039; (the default), &#039;&#039;&#039;html&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;plain_text&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;markdown&#039;&#039;&#039;. The choice effects the way in which the text will be displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Further tags, which usually include at least one &amp;lt;answer&amp;gt; tag, follow in the space marked with dots as child nodes to the &amp;lt;question&amp;gt; tag. The response-related tags are listed further down on this page. Various (optional?) tags are possible. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* penalty&lt;br /&gt;
* generalfeedback&lt;br /&gt;
* defaultgrade&lt;br /&gt;
* hidden&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;image&amp;gt; tag contains the url of any included image. Nested within the &amp;lt;image&amp;gt; tag may be an &amp;lt;image_base64&amp;gt; tag which contains the actual image data encoded in base64 [http://www.php.net/manual/en/function.base64-encode.php].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;In the following question type examples the common parts of the question are not shown to improve clarity. It&#039;s a good idea to export some examples yourself to see a full example.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Multiple choice==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MC questions have one &amp;lt;answer&amp;gt; tag for each choice. Each choice can carry feedback and score weighting (by using the fraction attribute). In addition, an MC question has the following tags:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* single &#039;&#039;(values: true/false)&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* shuffleanswers &#039;&#039;(values: 1/0)&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* correctfeedback &lt;br /&gt;
* partiallycorrectfeedback &lt;br /&gt;
* incorrectfeedback&lt;br /&gt;
* answernumbering (allowed values: &#039;none&#039;, &#039;abc&#039;, &#039;ABCD&#039; or &#039;123&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;single&amp;gt; tag is used to distinguish single response (radio button) and multiple response (checkbox) variants.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code xml&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;question type=&amp;quot;multichoice&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;answer fraction=&amp;quot;100&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;The correct answer&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;feedback&amp;gt;&amp;lt;text&amp;gt;Correct!&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/feedback&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/answer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;answer fraction=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;A distractor&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;feedback&amp;gt;&amp;lt;text&amp;gt;Ooops!&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/feedback&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/answer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;answer fraction=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;Another distractor&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;feedback&amp;gt;&amp;lt;text&amp;gt;Ooops!&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/feedback&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/answer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;shuffleanswers&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/shuffleanswers&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;single&amp;gt;true&amp;lt;/single&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;answernumbering&amp;gt;abc&amp;lt;/answernumbering&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== True/false ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Two answer tags are given, one which is true, and one which is false. The fraction attribute of the answer tag identifies which option is correct (100) and which is false (0). Feedback is supported. The following example shows the format when true is the correct answer and false is wrong.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code xml&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;question type=&amp;quot;truefalse&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;answer fraction=&amp;quot;100&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;true&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;feedback&amp;gt;&amp;lt;text&amp;gt;Correct!&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/feedback&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/answer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;answer fraction=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;false&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;feedback&amp;gt;&amp;lt;text&amp;gt;Ooops!&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/feedback&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/answer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Short answer  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The short answer question type supports alternative correct responses, each with its own weighting and feedback.  The Moodle XML format uses one &amp;lt;answer&amp;gt; tag for each of the alternative correct answers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;usecase&amp;gt; tag toggles case-sensitivity with the values 1/0. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code xml&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;question type=&amp;quot;shortanswer&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;answer fraction=&amp;quot;100&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;The correct answer&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;feedback&amp;gt;&amp;lt;text&amp;gt;Correct!&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/feedback&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/answer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;question type=&amp;quot;shortanswer&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;answer fraction=&amp;quot;100&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;The correct answer&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;feedback&amp;gt;&amp;lt;text&amp;gt;Correct!&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/feedback&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/answer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;answer fraction=&amp;quot;100&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;An alternative answer&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;feedback&amp;gt;&amp;lt;text&amp;gt;Correct!&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/feedback&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/answer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Numerical response ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following is a simplified version of the Moodle XML format for numerical responses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code xml&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;question type=&amp;quot;numerical&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;answer fraction=&amp;quot;100&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;23&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;feedback&amp;gt;&amp;lt;text&amp;gt;Feedback&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/feedback&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/answer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle also supports a &amp;lt;tolerance&amp;gt; tag (how accurate must the number be?) and one or more &amp;lt;unit&amp;gt; tags. Unit tags have names and multipliers. E.g. if the main answer is in kilometres, an additional answer could be the equivalent in metres with a multiplier of 1000.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; prior to 1.7.2 the fraction was expressed as a value between 0 and 1 in a &amp;lt;fraction&amp;gt; element and the answer value was &#039;&#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039;&#039; enclosed in &amp;lt;text&amp;gt; tags. This format of the numerical question type is deprecated but will still be correctly imported if found (for now).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Matching ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pair matching responses use the &amp;lt;shuffleanswers&amp;gt; tag to determine whether the order of the items should be randomized.&lt;br /&gt;
Each pair is contained inside a &amp;lt;subquestion&amp;gt; tag. The first item of each pair is contained with a &amp;lt;text&amp;gt; tag, while the second has an &amp;lt;answer&amp;gt; tag around it as well. Feedback and score weighting is not supported by Moodle for this response type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code xml&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;question type=&amp;quot;matching&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;subquestion&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;This is the 1st item in the 1st pair.&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;answer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
         &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;This is the 2nd item in the 1st pair.&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;/answer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/subquestion&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;subquestion&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;This is the 1st item in the 2nd pair.&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;answer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
         &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;This is the 2nd item in the 2nd pair.&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;/answer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/subquestion&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;shuffleanswers&amp;gt;true&amp;lt;/shuffleanswers&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Essay ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An example of the essay type question...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code xml&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;question type=&amp;quot;essay&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;answer fraction=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
        &amp;lt;text&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;lt;/answer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;/question&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There isn&#039;t an answer and there isn&#039;t a grade in this case. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; prior to 1.7.2 the fraction was expressed as a value between 0 and 1 in a &amp;lt;fraction&amp;gt; element and the answer value was &#039;&#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039;&#039; enclosed in &amp;lt;text&amp;gt; tags. This format of the essay question type is deprecated but will still be correctly imported if found (for now).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Other question types ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Cloze ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is supported, and depends on a special format for the &amp;lt;questiontext&amp;gt; tag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Description response type===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This response type has no further tags other than those contained in the question header (such as &amp;lt;questiontext&amp;gt;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Random matching ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle has a question type which consists of taking short answer questions in the same quiz and displaying them as a pair matching exercise. However Moodle is neither able to export nor import this question type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Useful utilities==&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://finemetronome.com/moodle/ Word Template for generating Moodle XML].&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://http://sites.google.com/site/moodlequ/ Moodle XML converter from txt files].   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.qedoc.org/en/index.php?title=Moodle_XML_format Quedoc&#039;s Moodle XML documentation]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle Docs&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Export questions]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Import questions]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[GIFT format]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Aiken format]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[XML FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Import and export FAQ]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Questions]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:Moodle XMLフォーマット]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de: Moodle XML-Format]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Tjuly</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>